Yamaha RX-V430 Handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
OWNER’S MANUAL
RX-V530/RX-V430
U
AV Receiver
0100V530(U)-cv1 12/27/01, 10:30 PM1
I CAUTION
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert
you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended
by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive
force, and uneven surfaces may cause the
product and cart combination to overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or
rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the
manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into
the product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION
0101V530_Cau_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSSAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION II
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved
by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the
FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high
quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this
product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC
Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.
Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this
product in a residential environment will not result in
harmful interference with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,
if not installed and used according to the instructions
found in the users manual, may cause interference
harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee
that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and
“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one
of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC
– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular,
specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the
grounding system of the building, as close to the point of
cable entry as practical.
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its
normal operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are
required, be sure the service technician has used
replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have
the same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric
shock, or other hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or
repairs to this product, ask the service technician to
perform safety checks to determine that the product is in
proper operating condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the
antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static
charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/
NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper
grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding
of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of
grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit,
connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for
the grounding electrode.
0101V530_Cau_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM3
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
left and right, and 10 cm at the back of this unit
— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,
vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical
shock, do not place this unit where it may get
exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.
4
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this
unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room
with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside
this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
–
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may
cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper,
tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct
heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit
rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or
personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than
specified is dangerous and may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any
damage resulting from use of this unit with a
voltage other than specified.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an
electrical storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects
and/or liquid drops inside this unit.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long
periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding
that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models
only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage
BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the
space below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
III CAUTION
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment
by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through
loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
0101V530_Cau_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM4
1
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS ............................................................ 1
FEATURES ............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3
Checking the package contents ................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................ 4
Remote control .......................................................... 6
Using the remote control ........................................... 7
Front panel display .................................................... 8
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP ................................................. 9
Speakers .................................................................... 9
Speaker placement .................................................... 9
Connecting the speakers .......................................... 10
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13
Before connecting components ............................... 13
Connecting video components ................................ 14
Connecting audio components ................................ 16
Connecting the antennas ......................................... 17
Connecting an external decoder .............................. 18
Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18
Turning on the power .............................................. 19
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 20
ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .. 21
Using the test tone ................................................... 21
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 23
Input modes and indications .................................... 25
Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING
(DSP) ................................................................. 29
Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29
Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29
CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30
Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30
CINEMA-DSP programs ........................................ 32
TUNING ................................................................ 34
Automatic and manual tuning ................................. 34
Presetting stations .................................................... 35
Tuning in to a preset station .................................... 37
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37
SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 38
Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 38
Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 38
RECORDING ....................................................... 39
ADVANCED OPERATION
SET MENU ........................................................... 40
Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .................. 40
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 41
2 LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 43
3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ................... 43
4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 44
5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and
right speakers) ..................................................... 44
6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 44
7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .............. 44
8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 45
9 DISPLAY SET .................................................... 45
10MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ........................ 45
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 46
Control area ............................................................. 46
Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 47
Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 47
Controlling other components ................................. 48
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT
SPEAKERS ....................................................... 49
ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME ..................... 50
ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS
FOR PRO LOGIC
MUSIC ......................... 51
Changing parameter settings ................................... 51
PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions ....... 51
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 52
GLOSSARY .......................................................... 56
SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 58
0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM1
2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
FEATURES
Built-in 5-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Main: 75 W + 75 W
Center: 75 W
Rear: 75 W + 75 W
[Other models]
Main: 65 W + 65 W
Center: 65 W
Rear: 65 W + 65 W
Multi-mode digital sound field
processing
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic decoder
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1
decoder
◆ DTS/DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder
◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
or DTS
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP
Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner
◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset
editing)
Other features
◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ “SET MENU” for optimizing this unit for your
Audio/Video system
◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance
adjustment
◆ 6-channel external decoder input
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes
RX-V530
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
■ About this manual
• This document is the owner’s manual for both the RX-V530 and RX-V430. For details on various functions unique to each model,
descriptions given for each model name.
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this
manual.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement
in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority.
0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM2
3
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
1
2
3
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
Installing batteries in the remote
control
Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the
+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings
(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.
1 Press the part and slide off the battery
compartment cover.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings on
the inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into
place.
■ Notes on batteries
• Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in
the operating range of the remote control, that the
indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline
and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging
carefully as these different types of batteries may have
the same shape and color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them
immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or
letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean
the battery compartment thoroughly before installing
new batteries.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have
been cleared.
AM loop antenna
(Europe, U.K., Australia and
Singapore models)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China,
Korea and General models)
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Remote control
GETTING STARTED
Checking the package contents
Check your package to make sure it contains the following items.
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (U.K. model)
A/V cable (U.S.A., Canada
and Australia models)
0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM3
4
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
EFFECT
1234567
90 e
irt8qyuw
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When
you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will
be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared-signals from the
remote control.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
4 INPUT MODE
Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,
DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is
connected to two or more input jacks. Priority cannot be
set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
5 INPUT l / h
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
6 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.
7 6CH INPUT
Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks. This audio takes priority over the source selected
with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the
remote control).
0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM4
5
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 SILENT (PHONES jack)
Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the speakers.
9 STEREO/EFFECT
Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect
reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel
signals are directed to the main left and right speakers
without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS
signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the
main left and right speakers.
0 PROGRAM l / h
Selects the DSP program.
q MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores the current station in the memory.
w TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.
e FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
r PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the
colon (:) turns on or off).
This button is also used to exchange the assignment of
two preset stations with each other.
t PRESET/TUNING l / h
Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not
appear.
y A/B/C/D/E
Selects preset station groups A to E.
u BASS
Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and
right channels.
Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the low-
frequency response.
i TREBLE
Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and
right channels.
Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the high-
frequency response.
0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM5
6
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
8
9
0
y
i
u
t
e
r
w
q
7
6
5
2
1
3
4
Remote control
This section describes the remote control controls and
their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected
before starting operation. See “REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES” on pages 46 to 48.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 CODE SET
Used when setting up the manufacturer code (see page
47).
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and set the remote control to
operate the selected source component.
4 DSP program
Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a
button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that
group.
5 LEVEL
Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted.
6 Multi control section
Used when changing the setting and to implement the
settings.
7 TEST
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
8 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
9 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
0 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
q SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
w 6CH INPUT
Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks.
e AMP
Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling
this unit.
r Å/ı
Sets the remote control to operate other components (not
necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this
unit’s input source.
t VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM6
7
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
30° 30°
Approximately 6 m (20 feet)
y MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output
to the previous volume level.
u STEREO/EFFECT
Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect
reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel
signals are directed to the main left and right speakers
without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS
signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the
main left and right speakers.
i SET MENU
Selects the SET MENU mode.
Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
■ Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,
stove or bath;
– dusty places; or
– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.
0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM7
8
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
RL
LCR
RC RR
LFE
VIRTUAL
DSP
PCM
MATRIX
SILENT
DIGITAL
dB
mS
MUTE
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
MEMORY
AUTO
PRO LOGIC
/
VOLUME
DTS
MOVIE
THTR
ENTERTAINMENT
12
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO
LOGIC
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
1234
57890qwert
6
1 Processor indicators
Lights up when the t, g, VIRTUAL,
PRO LOGIC
/
,
DSP
or MATRIX are activated.
2 Input source indicator
Shows the current input source with a cursor.
3 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
4 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
5 v indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
6 SILENT indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected while the
digital sound field processor is on.
7 Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
8 DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the
ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE
THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is
selected.
9 Multi-information display
Shows the current DSP program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
0 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.
q TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station.
w MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show a station can be stored.
e AUTO indicator
Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
r SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
t Input channel indicator
Indicates the channel components of input signals being
received.
Front panel display
0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM8
9
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
Speakers
This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-
field quality with a 5-speaker system, using main left and
right speakers, rear left and right speakers and a center
speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with
different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a
moving human voice and other types of sound may not
shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers
from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same
tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound
plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers
from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are
used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is
for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.).
The main speakers should be high-performance models
and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other
speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For
precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the
models of equivalent performance with the main
speakers.
■ Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when
playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is
ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.
PREPARATION
Speaker placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
■ Main speakers
Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance between
each speaker and each side of the video monitor should
also be the same.
■ Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front
face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to
the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the
monitor) and centrally between the main speakers.
■ Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position,
facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the
floor.
■ Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
Note
• If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear and/or center),
change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU
to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers
to.
CAUTION
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
Main
speaker (L)
1.8 m (6 feet)
Rear speaker (L)
Rear speaker (R)
Subwoofer
Main speaker (R)Center speaker
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM9
10
SPEAKER SETUP
Connecting the speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/
or the speakers.
If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers
in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.
■ Speaker cables
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable
together to prevent short circuits.
■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals
RX-V530
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
RX-V430
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
y
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Korea and General models)
• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the
knob (
RX-V430
open the tab) and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
A front speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
12
10 mm (3/8”)
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
2
3
1
2
1
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
(U.S.A. model)
(RX-V530 U.S.A. model)
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM10
11
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
DVD
PR/CR PB/CB Y
GND
75Ω UNBAL.
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
D-TV/CBL
DVD
DVD
VCR
IN
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD
/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
CD
V-A UX
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MAIN
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUTAUDIO
MAIN
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
+
–
+
–
+
–
L
R
L
R
L L
R R
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN
: 4Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
1
56
3
2
4
SPEAKERS
MAIN
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
++
––
L
R
L
R
1 3
5
6
2
RX-V430
Subwoofer
system
Center
speaker
(RX-V530)
Right
Rear speaker
■ SUBWOOFER jack
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or
rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency
effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your
SPEAKER SET selections.
Notes
• The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz.
• If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of SPEAKER SET
item “1D BASS” on the SET MENU to MAIN.
• Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote
control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 49).
Main speaker
Right Left
Left
1
2
4
3
6
5
The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening
room.
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM11
12
SPEAKER SETUP
SPEAKERS
MAIN
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
+
–
+
–
+
–
L L
R R
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN
: 4Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN
: 4Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6Ω
MIN. /SPEAKER
RX-V430
Switch
position
Left
Right
Speaker
Main
Center
Rear
Main
Center
Rear
Impedance level
The impedance of each speaker must
be 4 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 6 Ω or
higher.
The impedance of each speaker must
be 6 Ω or higher.
The impedance of each speaker must
be 8 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 8 Ω or
higher.
The impedance of each speaker must
be 8 Ω or higher.
(RX-V530 U.S.A. model)
■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
WARNING
Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the power of this unit is on, this may damage
the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch all the way to either position when
this unit is in the standby mode.
Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this
switch only when this unit is in the standby mode.
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM12
13
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the
mains power until all connections between the
components have been completed.
• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to
say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to
“–”. Some components require different connection
methods and have different jack names. Refer to the
operation instructions for each component to be
connected to this unit.
• When you connect other YAMAHA audio components
(such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or
changer), connect them to the jack with the same
number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this
labeling system to all its products.
• After you have completed all connections, check them
again to make sure they are correct.
• The name of jack corresponds to input selector.
■ Connecting to digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of
digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital
and DTS bitstreams. To enjoy multi-channel sound track
of DVD software, etc. with DSP effect, you need to make
digital connection. All digital input jacks are acceptable
for 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
Note
• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.
If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this
standard, this unit may not function properly.
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
DVD
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
Y
GND
75Ω UNBAL.
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
D-TV/CBL
DVD
DVD
VCR
IN
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD
/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
CD
V-A UX
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MAIN
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUTAUDIO
MAIN
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
+
–
+
–
+
–
L
R
L
R
L L
R R
(RX-V530)
DIGITAL INPUT jacks
(pages 13-16)
6CH INPUT jacks
(page 18)
Video component jacks
(pages 14-15)
Audio component jacks
(page 16)
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack
(page 11)
AC OUTLETS (page 18)
Antenna input
terminals
(page 17)
SPEAKERS terminals
(pages 10-11)
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack (page 16)
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 1/4/02, 3:05 PM13
14
CONNECTIONS
Connecting video components
Refer to the connection examples on the next page.
■ Types of video jacks
RX-V530
There are three types of video jacks as follows:
1 VIDEO jack
Conventional composite video signal.
2 S VIDEO jack
RX-V530
Transmits color and luminance separately and achives
high-quality color reproduction.
3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
RX-V530
Transmit color difference (P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
) and
luminance separately and provide the best quality
picture.
• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals
input through the composite video, S-video and
component jacks are only output through the
corresponding composite video, S-video, and
component jacks.
• Use a commercially available cable specified for
connecting each type of jacks.
• The description of the component video jacks may
differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, C
B
, C
R
/Y,
P
B
, P
R
/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer
also to the operation instructions for the component
being connected.
■ Connecting a video monitor
Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the
MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack.
Note
• If you connect this unit with a source component using S-video
(or Component video) jacks, you also need to connect your
video monitor using S-video (or Component video) jacks.
■ Connecting a DVD player
Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on
your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and
connect the video signal output jack on the component to
the VIDEO jack on this unit.
y
RX-V530
• If your video component has an S-video output or component
video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the
component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component
video signal output jacks on the component to the
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
• The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component which
does not have optical digital output jack. However, multi-
channel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals
input from AUDIO jacks.
■ Connecting a digital TV/cable TV
Connect the video signal output jack on the component to
the VIDEO jack on this unit.
RX-V530
Connect the optical digital audio signal output
jack on your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack on
this unit.
RX-V430
Connect the audio signal output jacks on your
video component to the AUDIO jacks on this unit.
y
RX-V530
• If your video component has an S-video output or component
video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the
component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component
video signal output jacks on the component to the
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
■ Connecting another video
component
Connect the audio signal output jacks on your video
component to the AUDIO jacks and connect the video
signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack
on this unit.
y (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models)
• You can connect the supplied A/V cable to V-AUX jacks and
use female connectors to connect a portable device such as a
game console or camcorder.
■ Connecting a VCR or DVR (digital
video recorder)
Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video
component to the AUDIO OUT jacks and connect the
video signal input jack on the video component to the
VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording.
Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component
to the AUDIO IN jacks and connect the video signal
output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on
this unit to play a source from your recording component.
y
RX-V530
• If your video component has an S-video input, connect the S-
video signal input jack on the component to the S VIDEO OUT
jack.
•
If your video component has an S-video output, connect the S-
video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO IN jack.
Notes
• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,
keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is
off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
•
RX-V530
S-video and component video signals pass
independently through this unit’s video circuit. Make sure to
connect this unit to both a source component and a recording
component using the video jacks of the same system.
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
Y
VIDEOS VIDEO
2 1 3
RX-V530
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM14
15
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
DVD
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
Y
GND
75Ω UNBAL.
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
D-TV/CBL
DVD
DVD
VCR
IN
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD
/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
CD
V-AUX
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MAIN
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUTAUDIO
L
R
L
R
VIDEO
INPUT
V
VIDEO
OUTPUT
O
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
V
V V
AUDIO
INPUT
L
R
VIDEO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
L
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
V
VIDEO
OUTPUT
O
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
L
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
RX-V530
V
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
R
VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
R
V
O
indicates video cables
indicates optical cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates left analog cables
indicates signal direction
Video monitor
VCR
DVD player
TV/digital TV/
cable TV
Another video
component
(RX-V530)
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM15
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting audio components
■ Connecting a CD player
Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player
to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack.
y
• The AUDIO jacks are available for a CD player which does not
have coaxial digital output jack.
■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD
recorder
RX-V530
Connect the optical digital signal input jack on
your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL
OUTPUT MD/CD-R jack for digital recording.
Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD
recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT
MD/CD-R jack to play a source from your recording
component.
RX-V430
Connect the input jacks on your CD recorder or
MD recorder to the MD/CD-R OUT (REC) jacks for
analog recording.
Connect the output jacks on your CD recorder or MD
recorder to the MD/CD-R IN (PLAY) jacks to play a
source from your recording component.
L
R
C
O
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT AUDIO
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
GND
75Ω UNBAL.
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
D-TV/CBL
DVD
DVD
VCR
IN
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD
/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
CD
V-AUX
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MAIN
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUTAUDIO
L
R
L
R
OPTICAL INPUT
OPTICAL OUTPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT
AUDIO INPUT
L
R
L
R
RX-V530
RX-V530
O
O
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
C
(RX-V530)
indicates right analog cables
indicates left analog cables
indicates signal direction
CD player
CD recorder or
MD recorder
y
RX-V530
• The AUDIO jacks are available for an CD recorder or MD
recorder which does not have optical digital input or output
jack.
Notes
• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,
keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is
off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
•
RX-V530
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC)
jacks are independent. Only digital signals are output from
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog signals from OUT (REC)
jacks.
indicates coaxial cables
indicates optical cables
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM16
17
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
MONIT
O
OU
T
D-TV
/CBL
DVD
GND
75Ω UNBAL.
E
O
VIDEO
VIDEO
R
OUT
FREQUENCY
STEP
100kHz/10kHz
FREQUENCY
STEP
50kHz/9kHz
FM/AM
(RX-V530)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM
antenna
(included)
AM loop antenna
(included)
Connecting the antennas
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and
GND terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.
Notes
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer
reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor
reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the
quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA
dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.
FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General
models)
Because the interstation frequency spacing
differs in different areas, set the
FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on
the rear panel) according to the frequency
spacing in your area.
North, Central and South America:
100 kHz/10 kHz
Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect the
AC power plug of this unit from the AC
outlet.
Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
Cut the external sleeve
of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for
connection.
Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
Insert the cable wire into the
slot, and clamp it with pliers.
Snap the cover into
place.
12
Unit: mm
(inch)
3
Lead wire
4
Clamp with
pliers.
Clamp
with
pliers.
Insert the wire
into the slot.
5
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength.
Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals.
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model)
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 1/4/02, 3:05 PM17
18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting an external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN
left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an
external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the
6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and
surround channels.
Notes
• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot listen to DSP programs.
• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of
“1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except
for “1E MAIN Lv”).
VO LTAGE
SELECTOR
SWITCHED
50W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(RX-V530 General model)
Connecting the power supply
cords
■ Connecting the AC power cord
Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and
General models ..............................................2 OUTLETS
U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS
is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM
POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply
power to any source component connected to this unit
whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power
(total power consumption of components) that can be
connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the
area which it was purchasing.
China and General models......................................... 50 W
Other models ........................................................... 100 W
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(China and General models)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE
plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/
220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM18
19
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
1
1
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
B
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
Remote control
Front panel
Turning on the power
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power of
this unit.
The level of the main volume, and then the current
DSP program name appear on the front panel display.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM19
20
Item
1A CENTER
1B MAIN
1C REAR LR
1D BASS
1E MAIN Lv
Description
Sets center speaker availability and size.
Sets main speaker size.
Sets rear L/R speakers availability and size.
Sets the speaker(s) to be used to output low bass signals.
Sets the main speaker level.
Possible settings (default
setting indicated in bold)
LRG/SML/NON
LARGE/SMALL
LRG/SML/NON
SWFR/MAIN/BOTH
Nrm (Normal)/–10 dB
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS
This unit has 5 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your
configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings
as well as other possible settings.
If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration,
see “1 SPEAKER SET” on pages 41-42 to change the settings.
Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1E
0104V530_20-22_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM20
21
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels
using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is
complete, the output level heard at the listening position
should be the same from each speaker. This is important
for best performance of the digital sound field processor,
and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro
Logic, Dolby Pro Logic
and DTS).
Note
• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from
the PHONES jack when using the test tone.
Using the test tone
Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the
speakers. The adjustment of each speaker output level
should be made at your listening position using the
remote control.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press TEST to output the
test tone.
TEST
RETURN
BASS
–
+
TREBLE
–
+
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
VCR
A
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
2,5
4
1
3
ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
3
3
VOLUME
+
–
VOLUME
Remote control
Front panel
or
3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the
front panel to the center position and adjust
the volume of this unit so you can hear the
test tone.
The test tone is heard (in order) from the main left
speaker, center speaker, main right speaker, rear right
speaker, rear left speaker, and the subwoofer. The
tone is produced for 2.5 seconds from each speaker.
* Subwoofer test tone is output after the rear left
speaker (LEFT SURROUND).
The front panel display shows which speaker is
outputting the test tone.
Note
• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this
unit to standby mode and check the speaker connections.
L SUR. R SUR.
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
*SUBWOOFER
AMP
0104V530_20-22_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM21
22
ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
4 Adjust the level of the
effect speakers using j / i
so that it matches the
level of the main
speakers.
While adjusting, the test tone
is heard from the selected
speaker.
Note
• To adjust the level of the main speakers, use VOLUME knob
(or VOLUME +/– on the remote control).
5 When adjustment is
complete, press TEST to
stop the test tone.
Notes
• If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON and the
center speaker is not connected, the center channel sound is
automatically output from the main left and right speakers.
• If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the
output level of the rear left and right speakers cannot be
adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the
rear right and left speakers.
• If “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the test tone
will be circulated skipping the subwoofer.
y
• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are
set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy
listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume
simply by adjusting the VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on
the remote control).
• If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, and
rear right) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the
main speakers, set “1E MAIN Lv” on SET MENU to –10 dB
(see page 42). This setting decreases the main speaker output
level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set
“1E MAIN Lv” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels
for the center and rear speakers again.
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
TEST
RETURN
0104V530_20-22_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM22
23
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the
input selector buttons on the remote control)
to select the input source.
The selected input source name and input mode
appear on the front panel display for a few seconds.
To select the audio source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks
(When combining with a video source)
• You need to select the input to which the video source
component is connected before selecting audio source.
Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the
front panel display.
Note
• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other
source can be played. To select another input source, first press
6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel
display.
INPUT
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
EFFECT
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
6
1
33
5
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
VCR
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
LR
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
1
353
5
6
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
or
Remote control
Remote control
Front panel
Front panel
Selected input source
6CH INPUT
6CH INPUT
Remote controlFront panel
or
0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM23
24
BASIC PLAYBACK
4 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the
component.
5 Adjust the volume to the desired level.
The volume level is displayed digitally.
Example: –70 dB
Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to
0 dB (maximum)
The volume level indicator also shows the current
volume level as a bar graph.
If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls
only effect the sound from the main speakers.
Notes
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the
center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left
and right speakers.
• If you have connected a recording component to the VCR
OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or
low volume during playback of other components, try turning
the recording component on.
6 Select a DSP program if desired.
Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on
the remote control) to select a DSP program. See
pages 29 to 33 for details about DSP programs.
When using the remote control, press AMP before
selecting a DSP program.
SLEEP
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
VOLUME
+
–
VOLUME
BASS
–
+
TREBLE
–
+
Front panel
or
Remote control
■ BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to enjoy video images
from a video source together with sounds from an audio
source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical
music while having beautiful scenery from a video source
on the video monitor.
Select a source from the video group, then select a source
from the audio group using the input selector buttons on
the remote control. BGV selections cannot be made with
INPUT l / h on the front panel.
■ To mute the sound
1 Press MUTE on the
remote control.
To resume the audio output,
press MUTE again.
y
• You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc.
• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front
panel display.
■ When you have finished using
this unit
1 Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the
remote control) to set this unit in the
standby mode.
PROGRAM
or
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Front panel Remote control
STANDBY
/ON
or
STANDBY
Front panel
Remote control
MUTE
0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM24
25
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
Input modes and indications
This unit comes with a variety input jacks. You can select
the type of input signals you desire.
Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input
mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on
the SET MENU (see page 45 for details).
1 Press INPUT MODE (the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control)
repeatedly until the desired input mode is
shown on the front panel display.
AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected
automatically as follows:
1) Digital signal
2) Analog signal
DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal
encoded with DTS is selected, even if
another signal is input at the same time.
ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is
selected, even if a digital signal is input at
the same time.
Notes
• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
setting.
• When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on
some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a
moment when playback resumes after a search because the
digital signal is selected again.
• When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded,
the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case,
set the input mode to ANALOG.
INPUT MODE
DVD AUTO
LR
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
SLEEP
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
Remote controlFront panel
or
Input mode
■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital
signals
The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz
sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz
sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
– DSP programs cannot be selected.
– Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the
main left and right speakers. (There may be sound
output from the subwoofer depending on the
SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.)
Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be
adjusted while listening to such a source.
■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs
• If the digital output data of the player has been
processed in any way, you may not be able to perform
DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection
between this unit and the player.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and
set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may
reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In
this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and
set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit
reproduces no sound.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with
the input mode set to AUTO;
– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-
decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after
having detected the DTS signal. When playback of
the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator
may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS
source can be played. If you want to play a normal
PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.
– When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or
skip operation is performed during playback of a
DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this
status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit
will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”
mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”
indicator will turn off.
0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:31 PM25
26
BASIC PLAYBACK
Selecting a sound field program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. For details about each program, see pages
29 to 33.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on
the remote control to select the desired
program.
The name of the selected program appears on the
front panel display.
AMP
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
PROGRAM l / h
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
EFFECT
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
1
2,3
3 After selecting the desired program, press
the same button repeatedly to select the
desired sub-program if available.
Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly
switches the sub-program between
“Sci-Fi” and “Spectacle”.
Notes
• There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this
unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format
and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal
formats.
• The digital sound field processor cannot be used when a source
connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected or
when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.
• The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program.
Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the
effect created by the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last DSP program used with that source.
• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source
and DSP program are memorized and are automatically
selected when you turn on the power again.
• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode
is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically
switches to the appropriate decoding program.
• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC Movie,
no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear
speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If
“1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center
channel sound is output from the main speakers.)
y
• You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM
l / h on the front panel.
• Select a program based on your listening preference. Program
names are just for reference.
DGTLz Sci-Fi
RL
LCR
RR
LFE
DSP
PRO LOGIC
/
VOLUME
MOVIE
THTR
1
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
Sub-program name
Program name
DGTL Spectacle
RL
LCR
RR
LFE
DSP
PRO LOGIC
/
VOLUME
MOVIE
THTR
1
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Program name
Sub-program name
0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM26
27
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
4 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the
decoder; PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC
.
5 After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC
), select the mode appropriate for the
source by pressing q/DTS SUR.
The selection switches as follow;
PRO LOGIC
Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music
y
• You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Movie, and PRO
LOGIC Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front
panel repeatedly.
■ Selecting PRO LOGIC
You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five
discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC
in program
No. 9.
1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback
on the source component.
2 Press AMP.
3 Press q/DTS SUR.
The previously selected sub program appears on the
front panel display.
PRO LOGIC
LR
DSP
PRO LOGIC
/
VOLUME
PRO
LOGIC
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Remote control
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
PROGRAM l / h
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
EFFECT
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
2
3,4,5
AMP
0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM27
28
BASIC PLAYBACK
■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround
EX or DTS ES software
Press MATRIX 6.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital + Matrix
6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder.
The display changes AUTO → Matrix6.1 → OFF each
time the MATRIX 6.1 button is pressed.
AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby
Digital + Matrix 6.1 and DTS + Matrix 6.1
depending on the signal. Virtual rear center
speaker does not work for 5.1 channel
sources.
Matrix6.1: This setting produces 6-channel playback of
the input source using the Matrix 6.1
decoder. The virtual rear center speaker can
be used when playing a 5.1-channel source.
OFF: Virtual rear center speaker does not work in
this setting.
Notes
• The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby
mode.
• Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not
contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the
Matrix 6.1 decoding mode. To turn on the Matrix 6.1 decoder
when playing such a source, select “Matrix6.1”.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP
programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers
to reproduce a natural sound field.
You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C
REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field
processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP
automatically.
Note
• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
“1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases:
– when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic
Normal, Pro Logic , or DTS Normal program is selected;
– when the sound effect is turned off;
– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;
– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;
– when using the test tone; or
– when connecting the headphones.
MATRIX 6.1
+10
The MATRIX indicator lights up.
STEREO
EFFECT
ENTER
STEREO
EFFECT
Front panel
or
Remote control
Spectacle 6.1
DSP
MATRIX
DIGITAL
MOVIE
THTR
1
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
■ SILENT CINEMA DSP
You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you
could expert from actual speakers with SILENT
CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP
by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack
while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the
DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT”
indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When
sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal
stereo reproduction.)
Notes
• This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or
96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.
• The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the
headphone.
■ Normal stereo reproduction
1 Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect
for normal stereo reproduction.
Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back
on.
Notes
• If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the
center speaker, rear speakers.
• If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is
automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear
speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.
• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the
sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU
to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.
• The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the main left and
right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the
setting of “1D BASS” on the SET MENU.
y
During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as
the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from
the components connected to this unit.
(While playing a source)
1 Press AMP.
2 Press d to display the information about the
input signal.
0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM28
BASIC
OPERATION
29
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)
Understanding sound fields
A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a
particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear
early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound
produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and
other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives
each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.
YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to
measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music
venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the
direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then
we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this
unit.
■ Recreating a sound field
Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your
listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound
field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires three effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.
The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the three effect speakers to localize the
virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener.
Hi-Fi DSP programs
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in
mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.
No.
1
2
3
4
Program
CONCERT HALL
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT
ENTERTAINMENT/
Disco
ENTERTAINMENT/
5ch Stereo
Features
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions
emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual
seat is near the center, close to the stage.
This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that
seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound.
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at
LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The
sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate”
sound.
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for
background music at parties, etc.
0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM29
30
CINEMA-DSP
Sound design of CINEMA-DSP
Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread
even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with
the images on the screen.
CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP
integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field
programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In
CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and
Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,
and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.
When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the
most suitable sound field program for that signal.
L SURROUND SOUND FIELD
R SURROUND SOUND FIELD
PRESENCE SOUND FIELD
DIALOG
EFFECT MUSIC
In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby
Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic
decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder
for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder for adding a rear center channel
(the rear center channel is outputted from virtual rear center speaker). You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to
optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source.
0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM30
31
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CINEMA-DSP
The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without
using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound
localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality
sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby
Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater.
■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect
These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing
on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,
left surround, and right surround channels. This
processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense
sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital-
or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the
clear separation of all channels.
■ Dolby Digital/DTS + Matrix 6.1 + DSP sound field effect
These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear
center DSP sound field created from the virtual rear center speaker.
■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect
Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right,
and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby
Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and
right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro
Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are
designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate
nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and
decoding processes.
■ Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic decodes Dolby Surround software into 5 discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2
channels in rear). There are 2 modes; MOVIE for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel audio sources.
Surround DSP
sound field
Right surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
Left surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM31
32
CINEMA-DSP
CINEMA-DSP programs
■ For movie programs: No. 7 to 9
This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal
format.
Table of Program Names for Each Input Format
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
DOLBY
DIGITAL
DTS DIGITAL
SUR
PRO LOGIC
PRO LOGIC
2 channel
Stereo
70 mm Spectacle
70 mm Sci-Fi
70 mm Adventure
70 mm General
—
—
—
—
Normal
Enhanced
Movie
Music
DOLBY DIGITAL
DGTL Spectacle
DGTL Sci-Fi
DGTL Adventure
DGTL General
Normal
Enhanced
—
—
—
—
—
—
5.1 channel
DTS
DTS Spectacle
DTS Sci-Fi
DTS Adventure
DTS General
—
—
Normal
Enhanced
—
—
—
—
DTS
Matrix 6.1
Spectacle 6.1
Sci-Fi 6.1
Adventure 6.1
General 6.1
—
—
Matrix 6.1
Enhanced 6.1
—
—
—
—
6.1 channel *
Input
Program
DOLBY DIGITAL
Matrix 6.1
Spectacle 6.1
Sci-Fi 6.1
Adventure 6.1
General 6.1
Matrix 6.1
Enhanced 6.1
—
—
—
—
—
—
* means the Matrix 6.1 decoder is ON.
y
• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will automatically switch to
the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.
• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the MATRIX 6.1 button
on the remote control, the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP
program is selected.
• MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the virtual rear center
speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.
• When playing a 6.1 channel source with MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control turned off, the program name changes to the
corresponding name for 5.1 channel.
Notes
• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode.
• When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, main and rear
speakers output effect sounds.
No.
7
8
9
0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM32
33
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CINEMA-DSP
Program
Enhanced Mode
No.
4
5
6
Program
ENTERTAINMENT/
Game
ENTERTAINMENT/
Concert Video
TV SPORTS
MONO MOVIE
Features
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to concert video sounds.
With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows,
music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is
oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the
surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence
sound field.
■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in
mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you
feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.
No.
7
8
9
Features
This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It
precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of
science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the
silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm
and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the
newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as
much as possible.
This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,
and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is
relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the
echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.
This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film
theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital
sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound
orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from
the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
General
0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM33
34
TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l
to tune in to a lower frequency.
When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown on the front panel display.
y
• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not
stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.
■ Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune in to it manually.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 described in
“Automatic tuning” at left.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from
the front panel display.
If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,
press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue the tuning search.
Note
• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change
the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.
Automatic and manual tuning
There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
■ Automatic tuning
1 Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,
press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
INPUT
PRESET
/
TUNING
233
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
4
1
FM/AM
or
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
AUTO
Lights up
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
POWER
SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
or
Front panel
Remote control
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
AUTO
Goes off
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
PRESET
/
TUNING
A AM 144O
TUNED
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
A AM 144O
TUNED
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
A AM 144O
TUNED
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM34
35
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
Presetting stations
■ Automatically presetting stations
(for FM stations)
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those
stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in
to any preset station by selecting the preset station
number (see page 37).
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number and the “MEMORY” and
“AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about
5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the
frequency currently displayed toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO
A1:FM
LR
MEMORY
AUTO
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
1
23
Lights up
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• When a station data is stored under a preset number, the
frequency and reception band are also stored.
• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or
AM station by simply following the procedure in the section
“Manually presetting stations” on page 36.
• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually
in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure
in “Manually presetting stations” on page 36.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit
will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward lower frequencies.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again.
FM/AM
0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM35
36
TUNING
■ Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5
groups) manually.
1 Tune in to a station.
See page 34 for tuning instructions.
When tuned in to a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of received station.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about
5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”
indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears and make sure that the
colon (:) appears on the front panel display.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
C :AM 63O kHz
LR
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
4
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
32,5
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
Flashes
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear on the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
A AM 63O kHz
LR
TUNED
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
PRESET
/
TUNING
C3:AM 63O kHz
LR
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
C3:AM 63O kHz
LR
TUNED
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM36
37
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations.
The example below describes the procedure for
exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the
front panel display.
3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the
front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Tuning in to a preset station
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote
control) to select the preset station group.
The preset group letter appears on the front panel
display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET
u / d on the remote control) to select a
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
A5:FM 9O.6 MHz
LR
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
EDIT E1-A5
MEMORY
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
Shows the exchange of stations has
been completed.
Front panel
Remote control
or
Front panel
Remote control
or
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
1
2
1
2
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
+
–
2,4 1,3 1,3
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
TUNED
MEMORY
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
TUNED
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM37
38
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The
sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer
also automatically turns off the external component(s)
connected to AC OUTLET(S).
The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.
y
• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you
can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions
of the timer.
Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly
to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP,
the front panel display changes
as shown below.
3 The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front
panel display soon after the sleep timer has
been set.
The display then returns to the previous indication.
SLEEP
SLEEP
1
2
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
B
SLEEP 12Omin
LR
DSP
PCM
SLEEP
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
CONCERT HALL
LR
DSP
PCM
SLEEP
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
SLEEP TIMER
Canceling the sleep timer
1 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”
appears on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the
“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns
to the previous indication.
y
• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit
in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control
(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the
AC power cord from the AC outlet.
0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:32 PM38
39
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
INPUT
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
B
2
SLEEP
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
Front panel Remote control
or
RECORDING
Notes
• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between the components connected to this unit.
• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, VOLUME, “5 L/R
BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not
effect the recorded material.
• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit
cannot be recorded.
• A given input source is not output to the same OUT (REC)
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not
output to VCR OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material
may infringe copyright laws.
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
■ Special considerations when
recording DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your
player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its
operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog
signal will be output from the player.
■ Timer playback/recording
This unit can perform playback or recording with an
external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating
instructions for the component and the timer to be used.
Notes
• Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when
playback or recording with the timer.
• If you do not want any sound output when recording with a
timer, turn the volume down.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so
on) from being lost even if this unit is disconnected
from the AC outlet. However, if the timer is turned off
for more than one week, the stored data will be lost.
21
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
– + – +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
STANDBY
/
ON
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for these components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected component.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM39
40
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
Adjusting the items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Note
• Some items require extra steps.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press SET MENU to enter
the SET MENU.
3 Press u/d repeatedly to
select the item you want
to adjust (1 to 10).
y
• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the
same order as when pressing d.
4 Press j / i once to enter
the setup mode of the
selected item.
The last setting you adjusted
appears on the front panel
display.
Depending on the item, press
u/d to select a sub item.
SET MENU
ADVANCED OPERATION
2
1
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
VCR
A
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
6
3,6
4,5
The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the
speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and
adjust or select the values as necessary.
y
• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
Items Initial settings
1 SPEAKER SET
A CENTER LRG (large)
B MAIN LARGE
C REAR LR LRG (large)
D BASS BOTH
E MAIN Lv Nrm (Normal)
2 LFE LEVEL SP/HP 0 dB
3 SP DLY TIME 0 ms
4 D. RANGE SP/HP MAX
5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R
6
HP TONE CTRL BASS/TRBL
0 dB
7 I/O ASSIGN
RX-V530
A (component video input) [A] DVD
[B] D-TV/CBL
B (optical output) (1) MD/CD-R
C (optical input) (2) MD/CD-R
(3) DVD
(4) D-TV/CBL
D (coaxial input) (5) CD
RX-V430
C (optical input) (1) DVD
D (coaxial input) (2) CD
8 INPUT MODE AUTO
9 DISPLAY SET
DIMMER 0
10 MEM. GUARD OFF
• In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the
default setting is indicated in bold.
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
AMP
0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM40
41
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
5 Press j / i repeatedly to
change the setting of the
item.
6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu
disappears or simply press one of the DSP
program group buttons to exit SET MENU.
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
Notes
• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,
some items are not affected.
• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level
adjustments in items 1A through 1D are not affected.
■ 1A CENTER (center speaker
mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
this unit can provide better dialog localization for several
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and
images.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D
BASS”.
NON
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signal are directed to the main left and
right speakers.
or
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected
from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for
more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,
adjust the items again.
0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM41
42
SET MENU
■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode)
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
LARGE
Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire
range of the main left and right channel signal is directed
to the main left and right speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel
are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”.
■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode)
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
LRG
Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or
if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the
rear left and right speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers.
The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D
BASS”.
NON
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you
select NON for “1C REAR LR”.
■ 1D BASS (LFE/bass out mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-
frequency signals can be directed to both main left and
right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used
for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
MAIN
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE
signals are directed to the main speakers.
BOTH
The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Low-
frequency signals designated to the main channels in
accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed
to both main speakers and a subwoofer.
Note
• When you select MAIN for “1D BASS”, the low-frequency
signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to
the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main
speaker mode.
■ 1E MAIN Lv (main level mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level
of the center, and rear (L/R) speakers with the main
speakers because of unusually high-efficiency
performance from the main speakers.
Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB
Nrm
Select this if you can match the output level of your effect
speakers with that of your main speakers when using the
test tone.
–10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of your
effect speakers with that of your main speakers when
using the test tone.
0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM42
43
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
2 LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a
Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the
low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to
certain scenes.
Control range:
SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB
HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
1 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted.
2 Press j to adjust the LFE level.
Note
• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones.
L
C
C
R
RL
RR
3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay
time)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel
sounds. This feature works when there is sound output
from the center speaker, with a source like Dolby Digital
or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker should be the
same distance from the main listening position as the left
and right speakers. However, in most home situations, the
center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers.
By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the
apparent distance from the center speaker to the main
listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the
same as the distance between the main left and right
speaker to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time
for the center speaker is especially important for giving
depth to the dialogue.
Control range:
CENTER .......................... 0 to 5 ms
Initial setting:
CENTER .......................... 0 ms
1 Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay
of the center channel sounds.
Center speaker image
y
• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening
position.
0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM43
44
SET MENU
7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output
assignment)
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component
to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack
or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component
names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes
it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively
connect more components.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the
remote control).
■
RX-V530
7A CMPNT-V INPUT for
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks
Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL
[B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL
■
RX-V530
7B OPTICAL OUT for
OPTICAL OUTPUT jack
Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL
INPUT jacks
RX-V530
Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
(3) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
(4) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
RX-V430
Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL
INPUT jack
RX-V530
Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
RX-V430
Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
Notes
• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
4 D. RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting
is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital
signals.
Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum)
MAX
Select the “MAX” for feature films.
STD
Select the “STD” for general use.
MIN
Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the
main left and right speakers)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level
from the main left and right speakers.
Control range: 20 steps for L/R
Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R
1 Press i to decrease the output level for the
main left speaker. Press j for the main right
speaker.
6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone
control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB):
BASS ............... –6 to +3
TRBL (treble) .. –6 to +3
Initial setting:
BASS ............... 0 dB
TRBL............... 0 dB
0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM44
45
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
8 INPUT MODE (initial input
mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn
on this unit (see page 25 for details about the input
mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the
type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for the respective source.
9 DISPLAY SET
■ DIMMER
You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Initial setting: 0
10 MEM. GUARD (memory guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings
on this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
Select ON to protect the following features:
• All SET MENU items
• Center, rear speakers, and subwoofer levels
• DSP program parameters
Notes
• When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone.
• When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET
MENU items.
0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM45
46
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other
manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes.
Control area
■ Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the
AMP mode.
■ Controlling other component
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component to be controlled by pressing an input selector
button.
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
Å/ı buttons and input selector
buttons switch the control area
for each component.
* Å/ı buttons are to operate
the other components that are
not connected to this unit.
Factory setting:
Å...VCR
ı...TV
Component control area
You can control up to 9 different components. You can set up
manufacturer code and program other remote control functions for
each component (see page 48).
Å/ı buttons
and input
selector buttons
The buttons in the
dotted lines
(SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, 6CH
INPUT, VOLUME
+/– and MUTE)
function in any
mode.
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
B
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
+
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Press AMP to
control this unit.
0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM46
47
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting the manufacturer code
You can control other components by setting a
manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9
component controls.
The following table shows factory-set component
(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code
for each component control.
1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to
select the component you want to set up.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four
digit manufacturer’s code for the component
to be used.
Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES”
at the end of this manual.
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.
Notes
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup
process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.
SLEEP
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
CODE SET
Component
control
(buttons)
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD
D-TV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
A
B
Component category
(Library)
CD
MD
TUNER
DVD
–
–
–
–
–
Manufacturer
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
–
–
–
–
–
TRANSMIT
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Code
0005
0024
0003
0098
–
–
–
–
–
Clearing setup manufacturer
codes
■ Clearing setup manufacturer
code for the component control
1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to
select the component control for which you
want to clear the manufacturer code.
2 Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.
Note
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,
the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from
step 1.
3 Enter the code number “0000”.
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the
manufacturer code for the selected component is
cleared.
y
• You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering
the code number “9990”.
POWER
SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM47
48
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling other components
DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV CD player CD/MD recorder Tuner
1 AV POWER *
1
Power *
1
Power *
3
VCR power *
1
Power *
1
Power *
1
Power
2 TV POWER *
2
TV power *
2
TV power *
2
TV power *
2
TV power *
2
TV power *
2
TV power
3 TV CH + *
2
TV channel up *
2
TV channel up TV channel up *
2
TV channel up *
2
TV channel up *
2
TV channel up
TV CH – *
2
TV channel down
*
2
TV channel down TV channel down
*
2
TV channel down
*
2
TV channel down
*
2
TV channel down
4 TV VOL + *
2
TV volume up *
2
TV volume up TV volume up *
2
TV volume up *
2
TV volume up *
2
TV volume up
TV VOL – *
2
TV volume down
*
2
TV volume down TV volume down
*
2
TV volume down
*
2
TV volume down
*
2
TV volume down
5 TV MUTE *
2
TV mute *
2
TV mute TV mute *
2
TV mute *
2
TV mute *
2
TV mute
6 TV INPUT *
2
TV input *
2
TV input TV input *
2
TV input *
2
TV input *
2
TV input
7 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)
8 TITLE Title
9 PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Preset up
PRESET/CH d Down
VCR channel down
Preset down
PRESET/CH j Left
PRESET/CH i Right
SELECT Select
0 RETURN Return
q
REC/DISC SKIP
Disc skip Rec *
3
VCR rec Disc skip Rec (MD)
w Play Play *
3
VCR play Play Play
e
Search backward Search backward
*
3
VCR search backward
Search backward Search backward
r Search forward Search forward *
3
VCR search forward
Search forward Search forward
AUDIO Audio
d Pause Pause *
3
VCR pause Pause Pause
t Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
y Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
a Stop Stop *
3
VCR stop Stop Stop
w ENTER Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index
e MENU Menu A/B/C/D/E
r DISPLAY Display Display Display
You can operate other components when you have set the
manufacturer code for your component. Note, however,
that some buttons may not operate your component.
Once you select an input source, the remote control
switches to the mode for operating the component.
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
B
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
+
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
0
q
w
e
r
*
1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button.
*
2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or ı. When the
manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and ı areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area.
*
3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR.
0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM48
49
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker
(center, rear left and right, and subwoofer) while listening
to a source.
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
1 Press AMP.
(While playing a source)
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker
changes and appears on the front panel display as
follows: center, rear right, rear left and subwoofer.
LEVEL
TITLE
AMP
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
+
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
B
1
2
2
3
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
LEVEL
TITLE
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS
y
• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to
be adjusted by pressing d / u.
Center speaker output level
Subwoofer output level
Rear left speaker output
level
Rear right speaker output
level
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
• The control range for the center or rear left and
right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB
to –20 dB.
Notes
• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C
REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1D BASS” to MAIN, the
output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there
is no sound coming from these speakers.
• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you
made with the test tone will be changed.
• We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps
described in “Using the test tone” on pages 21 and 22.
■ For 5ch Stereo
You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 5-
channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
• CT level (Center level)
• RL level (Rear left level)
• RR level (Rear right level)
1 Select 5ch Stereo.
2 Press u / d repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected
from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for
more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,
set the output level again.
0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM49
50
You can adjust the time difference between the beginning
of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of
the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the
value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay
time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs.
The following table shows factory-set delay time.
AMP
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
+
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
B
1
2
3
4
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
1 Press AMP.
(While playing a source)
2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the
delay time.
3 Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the
front panel display.
4 Press j / i to adjust the delay time.
Notes
• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with
some sources.
• The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay
time.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected
from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for
more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,
adjust the delay time again.
Program
Preset value (ms)
1. CONCERT HALL 45
2. JAZZ CLUB 30
3. ROCK CONCERT 15
4. DISCO 26
GAME 36
CONCERT VIDEO 21
5. TV SPORTS 10
6. MONO MOVIE 69
7. 70 mm SPECTACLE 23
DGTL SPECTACLE 15
DTS SPECTACLE 15
Spectacle 6.1 15
70 mm SCI-FI 20
Sci-Fi 6.1 15
DGTL SCI-FI 15
DTS SCI-FI 15
8. 70 mm ADVENTURE 20
DGTL ADVENTURE 15
DTS ADVENTURE 15
Adventure 6.1 15
70 mm GENERAL 20
DGTL GENERAL 15
DTS GENERAL 15
General 6.1 15
9. PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 15
DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5
DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5
Matrix 6.1 5
PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20
DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5
DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5
Enhanced 6.1 5
PRO LOGIC Movie 15
PRO LOGIC Music 5
DELAY
0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM50
51
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Changing parameter settings
You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC Music
parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in
your listening room.
Adjustments should be made with the remote control.
1 Press AMP.
2 Select PRO LOGIC Music.
3 Press u / d to select the
parameter.
4 Press j / i to change the
parameter value.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to
change other parameters.
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
–
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
90
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
+
–
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
B
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
–
+
–
+
–
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
A
1
2
3
4
Note
• You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEM.
GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter value you edited will
return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter
value again.
PRO LOGIC Music parameter
descriptions
■ PANORAMA
Function: Turning the function on extends the front
stereo image to include the surround
speakers for wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.
■ DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either
towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the
front), initial setting is STD (standard).
■ CT WIDTH (Center width)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three
front speakers to varying degrees. The
larger the value, adjusts the center image
towards the main left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only
from center speaker) to 7 (center channel
sound is output only from main left and
right speakers), initial setting is 3.
ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC MUSIC
AMP
0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM51
52
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and
contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
No sound.
The picture does not
appear.
Cause
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
on the rear panel is not fully set to either
the left or right position.
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
The speaker connections are not secure.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
Digital signals which this unit cannot
reproduce are being input to this unit by
playing a CD-ROM, etc.
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Remedy
Firmly connect the power cord.
Set the switch fully to the left or right position when
this unit is in the standby mode.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then
start operating.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT
l / h
or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).
Secure the connections.
Turn up the volume.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
Make connections using the same type of video
jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or
COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and
output.
Refer
to page
—
12
10, 11
—
10 – 16
23
10, 11
24
—
—
14, 15
RX-V530
0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM52
53
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
No sound from the
center speaker.
No sound from the
rear speakers.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
Poor bass
reproduction.
Cause
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
The sleep timer has functioned.
The sound is muted.
Incorrect cable connections.
Incorrect setting of “5 L/R BALANCE”
on the SET MENU.
The sound effect is off.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or
DTS decoding DSP program is being
used with material not encoded with
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is
being input to this unit.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
“1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set
to NON.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4)
has been selected (except for 5ch Stereo).
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal does not have a center
channel signal.
The output level of the rear speakers is
set to minimum.
A monaural source is being played with
program 9.
“1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to
MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
“1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel
source is being played.
The source does not contain low bass
signals (90 Hz and below).
“1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or BOTH and your system does
not include a subwoofer.
The speaker mode settings (main, center,
or rear) on the SET MENU does not
match your speaker configuration.
Remedy
Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set
to the appropriate position and then turn this unit
back on.
Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Adjust it to the appropriate position.
Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
Select another DSP program.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
Select BOTH.
Select MAIN.
Select the appropriate position for each speaker
based on the size of the speakers in your
configuration.
Refer
to page
12
—
—
—
10, 11
44
28
26 – 33
—
49
41
26 – 33
—
49
26 – 33
42
42
—
42
41, 42
0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM53
54
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
The volume level
cannot be increased, or
the sound is distorted.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
of this unit.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
This unit does not
operate properly.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears on the front
panel display.
There is noise
interference from digital
or high-frequency
equipment, or this unit.
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
Cause
Incorrect cable connections.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
It is not possible to record the sound
effect by a recording component.
A source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
“10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU
is set to ON.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Speaker cables are short circuited.
This unit is too close to the digital or
high-frequency equipment.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Remedy
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
Turn on the power to the component.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks of this unit.
Set “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU to
OFF.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected
correctly.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it
back on.
Refer
to page
10 – 16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RX-V530
0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM54
55
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
There are buzzing and
whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
Problem
FM
AM
Cause
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
There is multipath interference.
The station is too weak.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Remedy
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
Re-store the stations.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
Move this unit away from the TV.
Refer
to page
17
34
—
17
34
35, 36
17
34
17
—
■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Cause
Wrong distance or angle.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
The batteries are weak.
The manufacture code has not correctly
set.
Even if the manufacturer code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Remedy
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Reposition this unit.
Replace all batteries with new ones.
Set the code correctly.
Try setting another code of the same
manufacturer.
Refer to
page
7
—
3
47
—
—
0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM55
56
GLOSSARY
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for
dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound
within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that
gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.
With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has
a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).
By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound
processing provide listeners with previously unheard of
excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
■ Matrix 6.1
The unit incorporates Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby
Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to
existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is
created from rear left and right channels, and outputted
from virtual rear center speaker.) With this additional
channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic
moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over ” and
“fly-around ” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround
softwares. This new technology enables a discrete 5-
channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1
center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead
of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel
sources in addition to the movie mode.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial
representation of DTS digital surround in your home.
This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel
sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a
total of 5.1 channels).
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1 channel systems.
■ CINEMA DSP
DIGITAL
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and
designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and
so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are
differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth
of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed using headphones.
0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM56
57
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
GLOSSARY
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any rear speakers by using
virtual rear speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number
of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
P
B
/C
B
and P
R
/C
R
signals for the chrominance. Color can
be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM57
58
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 75 W
[Other models] .................................................................... 65 W
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 80 W
[Other models] .................................................................... 70 W
• DIN Standard Output Power
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 110 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................... 95 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 95/115/140/160 W
[Other models] ............................................... 90/110/130/150 W
• Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more
• Frequency Response
CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06%
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB
• Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
• Phones Output ............................................................. 0.34 V/560 Ω
• Input Sensitivity
CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ
6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level
OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ
OUTPUT SUBWOOFER .......................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL
• Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
• S-Video Signal Level
RX-V530
Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Component Video Signal Level
RX-V530
Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video (
RX-V530
) ............... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component (
RX-V530
) ............................... DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)
• Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB
• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz
[Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz
[China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model] .................................................................... 210 W
[Canada model] ...................................................... 210 W/260 VA
[Other models] ..................................................................... 230 W
Standby Mode ............................................................. max. 0.9 W
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models]
.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum)
• Dimension (W x H x D)
RX-V530
............ 435 x 151 x 387 mm (17” x 5-15/16” x 15-1/8”)
RX-V430
........... 435 x 151 x 380 mm (17” x 5-15/16” x 15-1/16”)
• Weight ................................................................... 10.0 kg (21.3 lbs)
• Accessories ............................................................... Remote control
Batteries
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter [U.K. model]
A/V cable [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models]
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
*Specifications are subject to change without notice.
0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM58
LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES
LISTE DES CODES DES FABRICANTS
TV
A TANDY 0941
ABEX 1151
ADMIRA 1141
ADVENTURA 1131
AIKO 1121
AIWA 1481
AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111
ALBA 0431
ALLERON 1091
AMBASSADOR 1081
AMSTRAD 0481, 1081
ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051,
1061, 1071
ANAM NATIONAL 1041
AOC 0361, 1021, 1031,
1111, 1161
ARCHER 1161
AUDIOSONIC 1001
AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161
BAUER 0441
BAUR 1001
BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561
BELCOR 1031
BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991
BEON 1001
BRADFORD 1051
BROCKWOOD 1031
BROKSONIC 1161
BUSH 1001
CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961,
0971, 1111, 1131
CAPEHART 1021
CARVER 0101
CATHAY 1001
CELEBRITY 0951
CENTURION 0411
CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561,
1621
CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921,
0931, 0941, 0961,
0971, 1111, 1121,
1131
CLAIRTONE 1011
CLARIVOX 1001
CONCERTO 0351, 0971
CONROWA 1751
CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011,
1051
CORANDO 0941
CRAIG 0251, 1051
CROWN 0941, 1051
CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361,
0931, 0941,
0981, 1111
CXC 1051
DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331,
0721, 0941, 1001,
1031, 1121, 1191,
1531, 1581, 1591,
1601
DANSAI 1001
DAYTRON 0941, 1031
DECCA 0271, 1001
DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071
DUMONT 0891, 1031
DYNATECH 0881
ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011
ELECTROHOME 0941
ELECTRON 0941
ELIN 1001
ELTA 0331
EMERSON 0001, 0021, 0061,
0071, 0081, 0091,
0111, 0811, 0821,
0831, 0841, 0851,
0861, 0871, 0901,
0921, 0941, 0981,
1011, 1031, 1051,
1081, 1091
ENVISION 0361, 1111
ERRES 1001
ETRON 0331
FERGUSON 1001
FINLUX 1001
FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981
FORMENTI 0441
FORMONTI 1001
FORTRESS 1141
FUJITSU 1091
FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501,
1521
FUTURETECH 1051
GE 0131, 0161, 0201,
0751, 0761, 0771,
0781, 0791, 0811,
0861, 1041
GEC 0271, 1001
GEMINI 0391
GENEXXA 0431
GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111
GOLDSTAR 0031, 0121, 0351,
0411, 0731, 0741,
0861, 0941, 0971,
1001, 1031, 1111,
1151
GOODMANS/TASHIKO
0271, 0661, 1001
GRANADA 1001
GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801,
1811, 1821, 1831,
1841, 1851, 1861,
1871, 1881
GUNPY 1051, 1091
HARMAN/KARDON
0721
HALLMARK 0861
HANSEATIC 1001
HARVARD 1051, 1061
HINARI 1001, 1091
HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671,
0681, 0691, 0701,
0711, 0871, 0941,
0971, 1351
HYPSON 1001
IMA 1051
INDIANA 1001
INFINITY REFERENCE
0101
INTERFUNK 1001
ITT 0611
JANEIL 1131
JBL 0101
JCB 0951
JENSEN 0311
JINXING 1531, 1541, 1551,
1561, 1571, 1621,
1631, 1641, 1651,
1691, 1731
JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641,
0651, 0661, 0841
KAWASHO 0901
KAYPANI 1021
KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111
KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131
KTV 0921, 0941, 1011,
1051, 1111
LEYCO 1001
LIESENK & TTER 1001
LLOYTRON 0941
LOEWE 1001
LOGIK 0991, 1771
LUXMAN 0351, 0971
LXI 0101, 0621, 0761,
0861, 0981
MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391,
0401, 0411, 0421,
0581, 0591, 0601,
0611, 0631, 0661,
0961, 1111
MAJESTIC 0991
MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361,
1001, 1111
MARK 1001
MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001
MEDIATOR 1001
MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161
MEI 1011
M-ELECTRONIC 1001
MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861,
0971, 0981, 0991,
1771
METZ 1791, 1831, 1891,
1901, 1911, 1921,
1931, 1941
MGA 0361, 0561, 0571,
0861, 1031, 1111
MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891,
0941, 1151
MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561,
0571, 0661, 0861,
1031, 1101, 1381
MONTGOMERY 1091
MOTOROLA 1041, 1141
MTC 0351, 0361, 0881,
0931, 0971, 1011,
1031, 1111
MULTITECH 0881, 1051
NAD 0551, 0621, 0861
NEC 0241, 0351, 0361,
0661, 0971, 1031,
1111, 1321, 1711
NECKERMANN 1001
NEI 1001
NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001,
1151
NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121
NOVABEAM 0721
NTC 1121
ONWA 1051
OPTIMUS 0551
OPTONICA 0541, 1141
ORION 0831, 1001
OSAKI 0271, 1151
OTTO VERSAND 1001
PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251,
0751, 1041, 1311,
1371, 1431
PANDA 1541, 1721
PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521,
0531, 0621, 0731,
0751, 0761, 0781,
0791, 0861, 0931,
0941, 1031, 1041,
1111, 1151, 1161
PEONY 1561, 1621
PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591,
0601, 0611, 0631,
0961, 1031, 1111
PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001
PHONOLA 1001
PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111
PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871
PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121
PRICECLUB 0931
PRISM 0751
PROSCAN 0761
PROTECH 1001
PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941,
1021, 1161
PULSAR 0891
PULSER 1031
QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041
QUELLE 1001
RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941,
1031, 1051,
1151
RADIOLA 1001
RCA 0051, 0141, 0151,
0181, 0411, 0491,
0531, 0761, 0771,
0871, 1031
REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941,
0971, 0981, 1031,
1051, 1111, 1151
RHAPSODY 1011
R-LINE 1001
RUNCO 0891, 1111
SAISHO 0331, 1081
SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021,
1111, 1151
SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351,
0361, 0861, 0931,
0941, 0971, 1001,
1031, 1111, 1151
SAMSUX 0941
SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271,
0661, 0801, 0911,
0981, 1231, 1251,
1261
SBR 1001
SCHEIDER 1001
SCIMITSU 1031
SCOTCH 0861
SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941,
1031, 1051, 1091
SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171,
0351, 0481, 0521,
0621, 0761, 0801,
0861, 0971, 0981,
1091
SHANGHAI 1561, 1681
SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541,
0661, 0911, 0941,
1141
SHOGUN 1031
SIGNATURE 0991, 1771
SIMPSON 0581, 0961
SOLAVOX 1151
SONOKO 1001
I
02V530_code(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM1
II
SONTEC 1001
SONY 0371, 0451, 0661,
0841, 0951, 1281,
1441
SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051,
1091
SOUNDWAVE 1001
SPECTRICON 1161
SQUAREVIEW 0481
SSS 1031, 1051
STAR-LITE 1051
SUPREM 0951
SUPRE-MACY 1131
SURPA 0351, 0971
SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441,
0581, 0591, 0601,
0611, 0631, 0961,
1111
SYMPHONIC 0481
SYSLINE 1001
TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141
TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001,
1041, 1161
TCL 1561, 1631, 1701
TECHNICS 0751
TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971
TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571,
0931, 0941, 0961,
0971, 0991, 1031,
1051, 1091, 1121,
1131, 1771
TELETECH 0331
TERA 0501
THAKRAL 1671
THORM 1001
TMK 0351, 0861, 0971,
1081
TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621,
0661, 0931, 0981,
1301
TOSONIC 1011
TOTEVISION 0941
TRICAL 0911
UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791
UNIVERSUM 1001
VECTOR RESEARCH
0361, 1111
VESTEL 1001
VIDEO CONCEPT 1101
VIDIKRON 0101, 0211
VIDTECH 0861, 1031
VIKING 1131
WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451,
0541, 0581, 0591,
0601, 0611, 0771,
0781, 0791, 0861,
0971, 0991, 1031,
1091, 1111, 1771
WATSON 1001
XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661,
1741, 1761
YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111
YOKO 1001
ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891,
0991, 1771
ZONDA 1161
CABLE TV
ABC 0256, 0376
ANTRONIX 0136
ARCHER 0136, 0286
BBT 0076
CABLETIME 0166
CABLEVISION 0196
COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346
COMTRONICS 0216, 0276
EAGLE COMTRONICS
0276
EASTERN 0066
ELECTRICORD 0206
ELECTUS 0266
GE 0116, 0126
GEC CABLE SYSTEM
0196
HAMLIN H5 0676
HAMLIN H6 0666
HAMLIN H6S 0656
HAMLIN H8 0646
HAMLIN H9 0636
JERROLD 0256
JERROLD 400L 0626
JERROLD 450L 0616
JERROLD 550 0606
JERROLD OSD CATV
0596
JERROLD SPRUCER
0436
MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS
0416, 0426
MAMM 0296
MEMOREX 0386
MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206
NORTHCOAST 0016
NSC 0146
OAK 0106
OAK SIGMA 450 0546
OAK SIGMA 550 0536
PANASONIC TZ 120/130
0476
PANASONIC TZ 170/180
0446
PANASONIC TZ140 0466
PANASONIC TZ150/160
0456
PARAGON 0386
PHILIPS 0036, 0216, 0306,
0316, 0326, 0336,
0346
PIONEER 0006, 0086
PIONEER BR50 0846
PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82
0696
PIONEER BR90 0556
PULSAR 0386
RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE
SYSTEM 0396, 0406
REALISTIC 0136
REGENCY/EASTERN 0686
RUNCO 0386
SAMSUNG 0276
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475
0576
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75
0366, 0586
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650
0566
SIGNAL 0276
SL MARX 0276
SPECTAVISION 0236
STANDARD COMPONENTS
0186
STARCOM V 0256
STARGATE 0276
SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN
0376, 0496
TEKNIKA 0176
TELESERVICE 0056
TELEVIEW 0276
TEXSCAN 0186, 0376
TFC 0026
TOCOM 0226, 0356
TOCOM 5503A 0526
TOCOM 5503VIP/5507 0516
TOCOM TC56 0506
TOSHIBA 0386
TUDI 0046
UNIKA 0136
UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206,
0286
VIDEOWAY 0096
VIEWSTAR 0216
ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486
SATELLITE TUNER
ALPHA STAR 0826
CHAPARRAL 0756
ECHOSTAR 0836
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0776, 0876
HTS 0836
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0816
JERROLD 0776, 0786
PANASONIC 0806
PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786
RCA 0766
SONY 0796
(DBS)
HITACHI 0856
MAGNAVOX 0886
MEMOREX 0886
PANASONIC 0896
PHILIPS 0886
SONY 0906
STAR CHOICE 0876
TOSHIBA 0866, 0916
UNIDEN 0886
VCR
A TANDY 0902
ADVENTURA 0992
AIKO 0982
AIWA 0992
AKAI 0262, 0942, 0952,
0962, 0972
AMERICAN HIGH 0932
AMSTRAD 0992
ASA 0002, 0912
ASHA 0922
AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202
AUDIOVOX 0912
BEAUMARK 0922
BELL & HOWELL 0902
BLAUPUNKT 0412
BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892
BUSH 0852
CALIX 0912
CANON 0862, 0932
CCE 0852, 0982
CITIZEN 0912, 0982
COLT 0852
CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852,
0912, 0922
CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822,
0932
CYBERNEX 0922
DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982
DBX 0202
DYNATECH 0472, 0992
ELECTROHOME 0912
ELECTROPHONIC 0912
EMEREX 0792
EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142,
0152, 0162, 0172,
0182, 0192, 0212,
0702, 0712, 0722,
0732, 0742, 0752,
0762, 0772, 0782,
0872, 0882, 0892,
0912, 0952, 0992,
1072
FINLUX 0002, 0992
FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842,
0902
FUJI 0672, 0932
FUNAI 0992
GARRARD 0992
GE 0662, 0822, 0932
GO VIDEO 0642, 0652
GOLDSTAR 0082, 0632, 0912
GOODMANS 0402
GRADIENTE 0992
GRANDA 0612, 0902
GRUNDIG 0002
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0992
HARMAN/KARDON
0632, 1082
HARWOOD 0752, 0852
HEADQUARTER 0612
HI-Q 0842
HINARI 0852
HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572,
0582, 0592, 0602,
0992
ITT 0942
JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532,
0542, 0552
KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612,
0632, 0902
KLH 0852
KODAK 0912, 0932
LLOYD 0992
LOGIK 0852
LUXOR 0942
LXI 0022, 0912
MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492,
0502, 0512, 0932
MAGNIN 0922
MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402,
0632, 0932
MARTA 0912
MATSUSHITA 0932
MATSUI 0722
MEI 0222, 0932
MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472,
0512, 0612, 0842,
0902, 0912, 0922,
0932, 0992
MGA 0762, 0952
MGA TECHNOLOGY
0922
MINOLTA 0592, 0602
MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542,
0762, 0952, 1082
MOTOROLA 0472, 0932
MTC 0922, 0992
02V530_code(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM2
III
MULTITECH 0852, 0992
NAD 0442
NEC 0122, 0202, 0292,
0422, 0432, 0542,
0632
NIKKO 0912
NOBLEX 0922
OLYMPUS 0412, 0932
OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912
OPTONICA 0402
ORION 0212, 0722, 0742,
0772
OSAKI 0912
PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092,
0222, 0372, 0382,
0392, 0412, 0932
PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602,
0632, 0692, 0912,
0922, 0932
PENTAX 0592, 0602
PERDIO 0992
PHILCO 0002, 0932
PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402,
0492, 0932
PILOT 0912
PIONEER 0442, 0542
PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022,
1032, 1042, 1052,
1062
PULSAR 0512
QUARTER 0612
QUARTZ 0272, 0612
QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932
RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992
RADIX 0912
RANDEX 0912
RCA 0112, 0382, 0392,
0482, 0592, 0602,
0662, 0822, 0942
REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612,
0682, 0842, 0902,
0912, 0922, 0932,
0992
RICOH 0352, 0362
SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722,
0732, 0742, 0772
SALORA 0612, 0762
SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922,
0962
SANKY 0472, 0512
SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832
SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842,
0902, 0922
SBR 0002, 0282
SCHEIDER 0852
SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762,
0872, 0882, 0892
SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602,
0612, 0682, 0692,
0842, 0902, 0912,
0932
SHARP 0402, 0472
SHINTOM 0852
SHOGUN 0922
SINGER 0852
SONY 0032, 0332, 0352,
0362, 0672, 0792,
0932
STS 0602
SUNPAK 0352
SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502,
0762, 0932, 0992
SYMPHONIC 0992
TANDY 0992
TASHIKO 0712, 0992
TEAC 0992
TECHNICS 0932
TEKNIKA 0322, 0912, 0932,
0992
TELEFUNKEN 0252
TMK 0212, 0732, 0772,
0922
TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342,
0622, 0682, 0712,
0762
TOTEVISION 0912, 0922
UNITECH 0922
VECTOR RESEARCH
0202, 0432, 0632
VIDEO CONCEPTS
0202, 0432, 0632,
0952
WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472,
0482, 0602, 0712,
0842, 0852, 0922,
0932, 0992
YAMAHA 0202, 0632
ZENITH 0042, 0362, 0512,
0672
DVD PLAYER
AKAI 0058
DENON 0188
HITACHI 0198
JVC (VICTOR) 0088, 0178
KENWOOD 0148
MAGNAVOX 0128
MITSUBISHI 0138
ONKYO 0068, 0128
PANASONIC 0028
PHILIPS 0098, 0128
PIONEER 0108, 0118
PROSCAN 0158
RCA 0158
SAMSUNG 0078
SHARP 0038
SONY 0018
TECHNICS 0028
THOMSON 0168
TOSHIBA 0048, 0128
YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098
ZENITH 0128
LD PLAYER
AIWA 0157
DENON 0147
DISCO VISION 0017
FUNAI 0157
HITACHI (E) 0017
KENWOOD 0087, 0107
MAGNAVOX 0027
MARANTZ 0027
MITSUBISHI 0137
NAD 0137
PANASONIC 0077, 0177
PHILIPS 0027
PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137
RCA 0167
REALISTIC 0157
SHARP 0127
SONY 0047, 0057, 0117
VICTOR 0097
YAMAHA 0007, 0067
CD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC RESEARCH
1295
ADC 0025, 0065
ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015
ADS 0265
AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035,
1055
AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535
ALPINE 1215, 1305
AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545
BSR 0245, 0655, 0775
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB
0055
CAPETRONIC 1205
CARRERA 0245
CARVER 0285, 1135
CASIO 0345
CROWN 0185
CURTIS MATHES 0345
DENON 0275, 0875, 0885
DEUAL (E) 0505
DYNAMIC BASS (H)
0555
EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105
EROICA 1275
FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925,
1005
GARRARD 0365
GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105
GOLDSTAR 1135, 1225, 1265,
1335
HARMAN/KARDON
0105, 0175,
0465, 0995
HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505,
0815
INKEL 0115, 0395
JVC (VICTOR) 0315
KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405,
0585, 0725, 0735,
0745, 0755, 0895
KYOCERA 0025
LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675,
0705, 0715, 0985
MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645,
0955
MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375,
0785, 1345
MCINTOSH 0355, 1085
MCS 0905, 1315
MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235,
0305, 0325, 1105
MGA 0135
MISSION 0215
MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445
MTC 1255
NAD 0035, 0615, 0685,
0695
NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515
NEC 0255, 0905, 0965
NIKKO 0545, 1005
ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495,
0805, 1155
OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555,
0595, 0845, 0855,
0865, 0895, 0935
PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095,
1125
PENNY 0905
PHILIPS 0165, 0215
PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045
PROTON 0215, 1185
QUASAR 0055
RCA 0205, 0915, 1115
REALISTIC 0205, 0225, 0235,
0325, 0555, 0845
REVOX 1175
ROTEL 0215
SABA TELECOMMANDER (E)
0505
SAE 0215
SAMSUNG 1285
SANSUI 0215, 0625, 0975,
1025, 1105
SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635,
0765
SCOTT 0325, 1105
SEARS 0345
SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895,
1065, 1075
SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395,
0475
SIEMENTS GARRARD
1245
SIGNATURE 0175
SONTEC 1165
SONY 0065, 0565, 0865,
1145
STARON 1235
STS 0025
SYLVANIA 0215
SYMPHONIC 0335
TANDY 0305
TANGBERG 1195
TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385,
0525, 0795, 0835,
1355
TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095
TECHWOOD 1325
TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505
THOMSON (E) 0505
TOSHIBA 0035, 0685
VECTOR RESEARCH
0065, 1135
WARDS 0175
YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,
0415, 0545, 0575,
1065
CD RECORDER/CD-
RW
HITACHI 0474
JVC (VICTOR) 0504
MARANTZ 0484, 0494
PHILIPS 0444
PIONEER 0454, 0464
YAMAHA 0414
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0384
PIONEER 0424
SHARP 0434
SONY 0394
YAMAHA 0024, 0394, 0404
02V530_code(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM3
IV
TAPE DECK
AIWA 0094, 0214, 0224
AKAI 0184
CARVER 0094
DENON 0304
FISHER 0144
GARRARD 0194, 0204
JVC (VICTOR) 0274, 0284, 0294
KENWOOD 0124, 0134, 0154,
0234, 0244, 0264
MAGNAVOX 0094
MARANTZ 0094, 0344
MITSUBISHI 0184
OPTIMUS 0034, 0064, 0204,
0334
ONKYO 0364, 0374
PHILIPS 0094
PIONEER 0034, 0044, 0064
REVOX 0354
SANSUI 0094, 0344
SHARP 0264
SHERWOOD 0334
SONY 0054, 0084, 0324
TEAC 0194, 0254
TECHNICS 0074, 0314
WARDS 0034
YAMAHA 0004, 0014, 0104,
0114, 0164, 0174,
0264
02V530_code(U) 12/27/01, 10:33 PM4
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
V874570
03V530(U)-cv4 12/27/01, 10:33 PM1
Documenttranscriptie
U RX-V530/RX-V430 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL 0100V530(U)-cv1 1 12/27/01, 10:30 PM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • 11 Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 12 13 WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, I CAUTION 0101V530_Cau_EN(U) 2 12/27/01, 10:31 PM SAFETY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/ NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. 2. 3. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. CAUTION II 0101V530_Cau_EN(U) 3 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 3 4 5 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. III CAUTION 0101V530_Cau_EN(U) 4 12/27/01, 10:31 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES ............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3 Checking the package contents ................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ................................................. 9 Speakers .................................................................... 9 Speaker placement .................................................... 9 Connecting the speakers .......................................... 10 Before connecting components ............................... 13 Connecting video components ................................ 14 Connecting audio components ................................ 16 Connecting the antennas ......................................... 17 Connecting an external decoder .............................. 18 Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18 Turning on the power .............................................. 19 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 20 ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .. 21 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 46 Control area ............................................................. 46 Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 47 Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 47 Controlling other components ................................. 48 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ....................................................... 49 ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME ..................... 50 ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC MUSIC ......................... 51 Changing parameter settings ................................... 51 PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions ....... 51 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION Using the test tone ................................................... 21 Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .................. 40 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 41 2 LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 43 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ................... 43 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 44 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and right speakers) ..................................................... 44 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 44 7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .............. 44 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 45 9 DISPLAY SET .................................................... 45 10MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ........................ 45 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13 SET MENU ........................................................... 40 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................ 4 Remote control .......................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 52 GLOSSARY .......................................................... 56 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 58 BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 23 Input modes and indications .................................... 25 Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ................................................................. 29 Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29 Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29 CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30 Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30 CINEMA-DSP programs ........................................ 32 TUNING ................................................................ 34 Automatic and manual tuning ................................. 34 Presetting stations .................................................... 35 Tuning in to a preset station .................................... 37 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37 SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 38 Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 38 Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 38 RECORDING ....................................................... 39 English 1 0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 1 12/27/01, 10:31 PM FEATURES Built-in 5-channel power amplifier Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Main: 75 W + 75 W Center: 75 W Rear: 75 W + 75 W [Other models] Main: 65 W + 65 W Center: 65 W Rear: 65 W + 65 W ◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset editing) Multi-mode digital sound field processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 decoder ◆ DTS/DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Other features ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ “SET MENU” for optimizing this unit for your Audio/Video system ◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance adjustment ◆ 6-channel external decoder input ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes RX-V530 ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ■ About this manual • This document is the owner’s manual for both the RX-V530 and RX-V430. For details on various functions unique to each model, descriptions given for each model name. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 2 12/27/01, 10:31 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the package contents Check your package to make sure it contains the following items. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Remote control AM loop antenna TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea and General models) A/V cable (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) (Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models) – MUTE PREPARATION + TV VOL EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E SELECT + BASIC OPERATION – TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. 1 • Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in the operating range of the remote control, that the indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Press the part and slide off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into place. English 1 APPENDIX If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have been cleared. 3 3 0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 ■ Notes on batteries ADVANCED OPERATION Installing batteries in the remote control 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES 9 8 0 q w e r t y + u – + i 1 STANDBY/ON 4 INPUT MODE Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks. Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. Standby mode In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 INPUT l / h Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 6 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the OUT (REC) level. 7 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. This audio takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 4 0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 4 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 9 STEREO/EFFECT Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. u BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the lowfrequency response. i TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the highfrequency response. PREPARATION 0 PROGRAM l / h INTRODUCTION SILENT (PHONES jack) Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the speakers. Selects the DSP program. q MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores the current station in the memory. w TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. BASIC OPERATION e FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. r PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the colon (:) turns on or off). This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. ADVANCED OPERATION t PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. y A/B/C/D/E Selects preset station groups A to E. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 5 0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 5 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the remote control controls and their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before starting operation. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 46 to 48. 1 2 TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT 9 3 Input selector buttons 0 Select the input source and set the remote control to operate the selected source component. w A AMP B e r + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 LEVEL PRESET/CH 5 LEVEL 6 Multi control section y Used when changing the setting and to implement the settings. ENTERTAINMENT 7 TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. 8 TRANSMIT indicator u Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 9 STANDBY SET MENU MENU TITLE Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group. t EFFECT 5 4 DSP program Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted. MUTE 4 2 CODE SET Used when setting up the manufacturer code (see page 47). q VCR Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 8 POWER 3 1 Infrared window i Sets this unit in the standby mode. A/B/C/D/E 6 – SELECT + 7 0 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. TEST DISPLAY RETURN q SLEEP REC AUDIO Sets the sleep timer. DISC SKIP w 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. e AMP Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling this unit. r Å/ı Sets the remote control to operate other components (not necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this unit’s input source. t VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. 6 0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 6 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS y MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. Using the remote control Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO EFFECT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES 30° i SET MENU INTRODUCTION u STEREO/EFFECT 30° + – + Approximately 6 m (20 feet) PREPARATION Selects the SET MENU mode. ■ Handling the remote control ADVANCED OPERATION • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. BASIC OPERATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 7 0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 7 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 MATRIX VCR DIGITAL VIRTUAL SILENT PRO LOGIC / V-AUX D-TV/CBL 3 DVD DTS DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC MOVIE THTR 12 ENTERTAINMENT MD/CD-R TUNER CD STEREO AUTO MUTE VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SLEEP L DSP dB mS PCM 5 4 6 7 8 9 C R LFE RL RC RR 0 q w e r t 1 Processor indicators 9 Multi-information display Lights up when the t, g, VIRTUAL, PRO LOGIC / , DSP or MATRIX are activated. Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 2 Input source indicator 0 STEREO indicator Shows the current input source with a cursor. Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 3 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. q TUNED indicator 4 VOLUME level indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station. Indicates the volume level. w MEMORY indicator 5 v indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. e AUTO indicator 6 SILENT indicator r SLEEP indicator Lights up when headphones are connected while the digital sound field processor is on. Lights up while the sleep timer is on. 7 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. t Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. 8 DSP program indicators The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. 8 0102V530_1-8_EN(U) 8 12/27/01, 10:31 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speaker placement The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance between each speaker and each side of the video monitor should also be the same. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and centrally between the main speakers. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Main speaker (R) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field Center speaker BASIC OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 5-speaker system, using main left and right speakers, rear left and right speakers and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. INTRODUCTION Speakers Note CAUTION APPENDIX • If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear and/or center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers to. Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. English 9 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 9 12/27/01, 10:31 PM SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/ or the speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 2 ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals RX-V530 2 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 1 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (U.S.A. model) RX-V430 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 3 2 1 2 Open the tab. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. y Banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Korea and General models) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob ( RX-V430 open the tab) and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. (RX-V530 U.S.A. model) ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals A front speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 10 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 10 12/27/01, 10:31 PM SPEAKER SETUP Main speaker Right Left 2 INTRODUCTION 1 Center speaker 3 (RX-V530) CENTER DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUDIO MAIN + L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND TUNER – AM ANT CENTER IN PR/CR VCR PB/CB Y DVD 75Ω UNBAL. D-TV /CBL FM ANT MONITOR OUT DVD R MAIN L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL + IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) MD/CD-R AC OUTLETS OUT CD AUDIO VIDEO SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR MONITOR OUT OUTPUT + DVD PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO GND – SUB WOOFER – COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL SPEAKERS L REAR (SURROUND) R MAIN CENTER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN CENTER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 4 BASIC OPERATION 5 L 6 Right Left Rear speaker Subwoofer system RX-V430 3 1 4 SPEAKERS 2 MAIN L 5 R REAR L (SURROUND) CENTER – R + 3 2 ADVANCED OPERATION 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION + – 6 The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening room. 5 6 ■ SUBWOOFER jack Notes 11 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 11 12/27/01, 10:31 PM English • The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz. • If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of SPEAKER SET item “1D BASS” on the SET MENU to MAIN. • Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 49). APPENDIX When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the power of this unit is on, this may damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch all the way to either position when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. Switch position CENTER Speaker Impedance level Main The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. + SPEAKERS – Left – – + + R L MAIN SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR R REAR (SURROUND) MAIN CENTER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN CENTER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. L (RX-V530 U.S.A. model) Right Rear RX-V430 The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN CENTER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN CENTER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 12 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 12 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONNECTIONS This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. To enjoy multi-channel sound track of DVD software, etc. with DSP effect, you need to make digital connection. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between the components have been completed. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. PREPARATION • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. • The name of jack corresponds to input selector. INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting to digital jacks Before connecting components BASIC OPERATION DIGITAL INPUT jacks (pages 13-16) SPEAKERS terminals (pages 10-11) (RX-V530) CENTER DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT ADVANCED OPERATION Antenna input terminals (page 17) 6CH INPUT jacks (page 18) VIDEO AUDIO MAIN + L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND – IN COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR VCR PB/CB Y – GND DVD OUT 75Ω UNBAL. MD/CD-R MONITOR OUT DVD R MAIN L R REAR (SURROUND) L L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) + CD + DVD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER – COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL SPEAKERS TUNER AUDIO AC OUTLETS (page 18) SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack (page 11) Audio component jacks (page 16) APPENDIX DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (page 16) VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT Video component jacks (pages 14-15) English 13 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 13 1/4/02, 3:05 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components Refer to the connection examples on the next page. ■ Types of video jacks RX-V530 There are three types of video jacks as follows: COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO PR/CR PB/CB Y ■ Connecting a digital TV/cable TV Connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. RX-V530 Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. RX-V430 Connect the audio signal output jacks on your video component to the AUDIO jacks on this unit. y 2 1 VIDEO jack 1 3 Conventional composite video signal. 2 S VIDEO jack RX-V530 Transmits color and luminance separately and achives high-quality color reproduction. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks RX-V530 Transmit color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) and luminance separately and provide the best quality picture. • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are only output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks. • Use a commercially available cable specified for connecting each type of jacks. • The description of the component video jacks may differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer also to the operation instructions for the component being connected. ■ Connecting a video monitor Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack. Note RX-V530 • If you connect this unit with a source component using S-video (or Component video) jacks, you also need to connect your video monitor using S-video (or Component video) jacks. ■ Connecting a DVD player Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. y RX-V530 RX-V530 • If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component video signal output jacks on the component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. ■ Connecting another video component Connect the audio signal output jacks on your video component to the AUDIO jacks and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. y (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) • You can connect the supplied A/V cable to V-AUX jacks and use female connectors to connect a portable device such as a game console or camcorder. ■ Connecting a VCR or DVR (digital video recorder) Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video component to the AUDIO OUT jacks and connect the video signal input jack on the video component to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording. Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component to the AUDIO IN jacks and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on this unit to play a source from your recording component. y RX-V530 • If your video component has an S-video input, connect the Svideo signal input jack on the component to the S VIDEO OUT jack. • If your video component has an S-video output, connect the Svideo signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO IN jack. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • RX-V530 S-video and component video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuit. Make sure to connect this unit to both a source component and a recording component using the video jacks of the same system. • If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component video signal output jacks on the component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component which does not have optical digital output jack. However, multichannel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals input from AUDIO jacks. 14 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 14 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONNECTIONS O OPTICAL OUTPUT RX-V530 Another video component VCR AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT R L L 6CH INPUT V R AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT L V TV/digital TV/ cable TV R V VIDEO OUTPUT V PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO MAIN L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND COAXIAL TUNER AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER OPTICAL D-TV/CBL IN COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR PB/CB BASIC OPERATION GND VCR Y DVD DVD OUT CD 75Ω UNBAL. MONITOR OUT DVD L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) MD/CD-R AUDIO INTRODUCTION L R VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION V (RX-V530) V VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT O OPTICAL OUTPUT DVD player ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Video monitor indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables APPENDIX L English 15 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 15 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connecting a CD player Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack. y • The AUDIO jacks are available for a CD player which does not have coaxial digital output jack. ■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder y RX-V530 • The AUDIO jacks are available for an CD recorder or MD recorder which does not have optical digital input or output jack. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • RX-V530 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. RX-V530 Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R jack for digital recording. Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R jack to play a source from your recording component. RX-V430 Connect the input jacks on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the MD/CD-R OUT (REC) jacks for analog recording. Connect the output jacks on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the MD/CD-R IN (PLAY) jacks to play a source from your recording component. DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL OUTPUT CD player 6CH INPUT AUDIO VIDEO MAIN L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD C AUDIO OUTPUT V-AUX SURROUND COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL TUNER AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER IN GND L VCR DVD R OUT CD 75Ω UNBAL. OPTICAL OUTPUT RX-V530 MD/CD-R O CD recorder or MD recorder O OPTICAL INPUT RX-V530 FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) DVD L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO L DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT R AUDIO INPUT (RX-V530) indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables C indicates coaxial cables O indicates optical cables 16 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 16 12/27/01, 10:31 PM VIDEO MONITOR OUT CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) (RX-V530) EO VIDEO TUNER AM ANT PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. GND DVD 75Ω UNBAL. D-TV /CBL BASIC OPERATION FM ANT MONITO OUT VIDEO R OUT FREQUENCY STEP Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) 1 2 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. 3 Lead wire FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models) FM/AM Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. 50kHz/9kHz 100kHz/10kHz Cut the lead wire and remove it. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. Snap the cover into place. FREQUENCY STEP English Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. 17 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 17 APPENDIX 4 Clamp with pliers. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. Unit: mm (inch) ADVANCED OPERATION Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. 1/4/02, 3:05 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes Connecting the power supply cords VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 50W MAX. TOTAL • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except for “1E MAIN Lv”). (RX-V530 General model) ■ Connecting the AC power cord Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and General models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any source component connected to this unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the area which it was purchasing. China and General models ......................................... 50 W Other models ........................................................... 100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/ 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 18 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 18 12/27/01, 10:31 PM CONNECTIONS Turning on the power INTRODUCTION When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. 1 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + PREPARATION TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT BASIC OPERATION + TV VOL 1 – MUTE HALL 1 JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER or ADVANCED OPERATION STANDBY /ON Remote control Front panel The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 19 0103V530_9-19_EN(U) 19 12/27/01, 10:31 PM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS This unit has 5 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, see “1 SPEAKER SET” on pages 41-42 to change the settings. Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1E Item Description Possible settings (default setting indicated in bold) 1A CENTER Sets center speaker availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1B MAIN Sets main speaker size. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR LR Sets rear L/R speakers availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1D BASS Sets the speaker(s) to be used to output low bass signals. 1E MAIN Lv Sets the main speaker level. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH Nrm (Normal)/–10 dB 20 0104V530_20-22_EN(U) 20 12/27/01, 10:31 PM ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Note 3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position and adjust the volume of this unit so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard (in order) from the main left speaker, center speaker, main right speaker, rear right speaker, rear left speaker, and the subwoofer. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds from each speaker. + VOLUME – or Using the test tone BASS – TREBLE + Remote control + – BASIC OPERATION Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the speakers. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position using the remote control. PREPARATION VOLUME • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. Front panel 3 LEFT RIGHT VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE INTRODUCTION This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is complete, the output level heard at the listening position should be the same from each speaker. This is important for best performance of the digital sound field processor, and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic and DTS). 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER CENTER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – + – + ADVANCED OPERATION STEREO PHONES *SUBWOOFER 3 AMP VCR A + + + TV CH VOLUME TV VOL B – TV INPUT – L SUR. * Subwoofer test tone is output after the rear left speaker (LEFT SURROUND). MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 The front panel display shows which speaker is outputting the test tone. EFFECT LEVEL 4 2,5 PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE Note A/B/C/D/E – R SUR. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – TV MUTE 1 3 SELECT + TEST • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit to standby mode and check the speaker connections. DISPLAY RETURN AMP Press AMP. 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. APPENDIX 1 TEST RETURN English 21 0104V530_20-22_EN(U) 21 12/27/01, 10:31 PM ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS 4 Adjust the level of the effect speakers using j / i so that it matches the level of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. PRESET/CH – SELECT + Note • To adjust the level of the main speakers, use VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). 5 When adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. TEST RETURN Notes • If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON and the center speaker is not connected, the center channel sound is automatically output from the main left and right speakers. • If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the output level of the rear left and right speakers cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the rear right and left speakers. • If “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the test tone will be circulated skipping the subwoofer. y • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume simply by adjusting the VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). • If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, and rear right) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the main speakers, set “1E MAIN Lv” on SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 42). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E MAIN Lv” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. 22 0104V530_20-22_EN(U) 22 12/27/01, 10:31 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 5 3 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS 3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING FM/AM INTRODUCTION 1 A/B/C/D/E INPUT EFFECT EDIT – PHONES + – + or 6 5 Front panel Remote control TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME 3 L R 5 Selected input source MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 6 ENTER EFFECT 1 SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT or Front panel Remote control Front panel 2 Remote control ADVANCED OPERATION Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. To select the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks (When combining with a video source) • You need to select the input to which the video source component is connected before selecting audio source. Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION CD DVD 3 PREPARATION VCR Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Note • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source, first press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display. APPENDIX English 23 0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 23 12/27/01, 10:31 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 4 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Adjust the volume to the desired level. The volume level is displayed digitally. Example: –70 dB Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to 0 dB (maximum) The volume level indicator also shows the current volume level as a bar graph. If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls only effect the sound from the main speakers. ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to enjoy video images from a video source together with sounds from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from a video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group, then select a source from the audio group using the input selector buttons on the remote control. BGV selections cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel. VOLUME CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + or VOLUME – BASS – TREBLE + – ■ To mute the sound 1 Remote control + Front panel • You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. Notes Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 29 to 33 for details about DSP programs. When using the remote control, press AMP before selecting a DSP program. PROGRAM or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ■ When you have finished using this unit 1 Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. STANDBY STANDBY /ON or Front panel ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Front panel Remote control 24 0105V530_23-28_EN(U) MUTE y • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left and right speakers. • If you have connected a recording component to the VCR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or low volume during playback of other components, try turning the recording component on. 6 Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. 24 12/27/01, 10:31 PM Remote control BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital signals Input modes and indications Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on the SET MENU (see page 45 for details). 1 CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP INPUT MODE or Front panel V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME DVD AUTO L R Input mode AUTO: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes APPENDIX • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is selected automatically as follows: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected, even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected, even if a digital signal is input at the same time. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed during playback of a DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC OPERATION VCR Remote control ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: – DSP programs cannot be selected. – Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the main left and right speakers. (There may be sound output from the subwoofer depending on the SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.) Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be adjusted while listening to such a source. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with a variety input jacks. You can select the type of input signals you desire. English 25 0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 25 12/27/01, 10:31 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a sound field program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see pages 29 to 33. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly switches the sub-program between “Sci-Fi” and “Spectacle”. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 ENTERTAINMENT STANDBY /ON 5 BASS 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING /DTS SUR. A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – 9 + ENTER EFFECT PROGRAM l / h Program name TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP VCR DSP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME PRO LOGIC / 1 MOVIE THTR 1 DGTLzSci-Fi L C R LFE RL RR Sub-program name Notes MUTE ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 • There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal formats. • The digital sound field processor cannot be used when a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected or when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC Movie, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers.) ENTERTAINMENT 2,3 EFFECT 1 Press AMP. 2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on the remote control to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display. AMP HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Program name VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME PRO LOGIC / DSP MOVIE THTR 1 DGTL Spectacle Sub-program name y L C R LFE RL RR • You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. • Select a program based on your listening preference. Program names are just for reference. 26 0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 26 12/27/01, 10:32 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Selecting PRO LOGIC 4 HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 VOLUME INPUT Press SELECT repeatedly to select the decoder; PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC . INPUT M0DE ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 6CH INPUT /DTS SUR. NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 9 ENTER EFFECT STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING FM/AM 5 A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV CH VOLUME POWER POWER TV AV CD HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. TV VOL – TV INPUT 9 0 +10 ENTER y JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 9 8 STEREO – HALL /DTS SUR. 7 MATRIX 6.1 EFFECT MUTE 3,4,5 6 SELECT • You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Movie, and PRO LOGIC Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. ENTER EFFECT 1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press q/DTS SUR. The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. AMP JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 5 ADVANCED OPERATION HALL /DTS SUR. ENTER EFFECT Remote control VCR BASIC OPERATION – TV MUTE 2 ENTERTAINMENT PREPARATION PROGRAM l / h After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC ), select the mode appropriate for the source by pressing q/DTS SUR. The selection switches as follow; PRO LOGIC Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music INTRODUCTION You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC in program No. 9. V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R PRO LOGIC TUNER CD VOLUME PRO LOGIC / PRO LOGIC L APPENDIX DSP R English 27 0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 27 12/27/01, 10:32 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP Press MATRIX 6.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder. MATRIX MATRIX 6.1 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER DIGITAL MOVIE THTR 1 +10 Spectacle 6.1 DSP The MATRIX indicator lights up. The display changes AUTO → Matrix6.1 → OFF each time the MATRIX 6.1 button is pressed. AUTO: Matrix6.1: OFF: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 and DTS + Matrix 6.1 depending on the signal. Virtual rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. This setting produces 6-channel playback of the input source using the Matrix 6.1 decoder. The virtual rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1-channel source. Virtual rear center speaker does not work in this setting. You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you could expert from actual speakers with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) Notes • This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphone. ■ Normal stereo reproduction 1 Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back on. STEREO STEREO or ENTER EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Notes • The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby mode. • Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the Matrix 6.1 decoding mode. To turn on the Matrix 6.1 decoder when playing such a source, select “Matrix6.1”. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP automatically. Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic , or DTS Normal program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. Notes • If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers. • If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. • The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the main left and right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the setting of “1D BASS” on the SET MENU. y During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the components connected to this unit. (While playing a source) 1 2 Press AMP. Press d to display the information about the input signal. PRESET/CH – SELECT 28 0105V530_23-28_EN(U) 28 12/27/01, 10:32 PM + DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) PREPARATION A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. INTRODUCTION Understanding sound fields ■ Recreating a sound field BASIC OPERATION Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires three effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the three effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener. Hi-Fi DSP programs No. Program ADVANCED OPERATION The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Features A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT/ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. ENTERTAINMENT/ 5ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties, etc. APPENDIX CONCERT HALL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 English 29 0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 29 12/27/01, 10:32 PM CINEMA-DSP Sound design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder for adding a rear center channel (the rear center channel is outputted from virtual rear center speaker). You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. 30 0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 30 12/27/01, 10:32 PM CINEMA-DSP ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + Matrix 6.1 + DSP sound field effect ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Dolby Pro Logic ADVANCED OPERATION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right, and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the virtual rear center speaker. PREPARATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround, and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digitalor DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field INTRODUCTION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater. Dolby Pro Logic decodes Dolby Surround software into 5 discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 channels in rear). There are 2 modes; MOVIE for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel audio sources. APPENDIX English 31 0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 31 12/27/01, 10:32 PM CINEMA-DSP CINEMA-DSP programs ■ For movie programs: No. 7 to 9 This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal format. Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 2 channel 5.1 channel 6.1 channel * Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY DIGITAL Matrix 6.1 DTS Matrix 6.1 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle 6.1 Spectacle 6.1 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi 6.1 Sci-Fi 6.1 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure 6.1 Adventure 6.1 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General 6.1 General 6.1 — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 — — — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Program 7 8 9 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DIGITAL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC * means the Matrix 6.1 decoder is ON. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will automatically switch to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the MATRIX 6.1 button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected. • MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the virtual rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing a 6.1 channel source with MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control turned off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Notes • The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode. • When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, main and rear speakers output effect sounds. 32 0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 32 12/27/01, 10:32 PM CINEMA-DSP The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. 7 MOVIE THEATER 2 This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Enhanced Mode ■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6 No. Features This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. ENTERTAINMENT/ Concert Video This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to concert video sounds. 5 TV SPORTS With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. APPENDIX ENTERTAINMENT/ Game ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 Program ADVANCED OPERATION This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION 9 Spectacle PREPARATION 8 Features Program MOVIE THEATER 1 INTRODUCTION No. English 33 0106V530_29-33_EN(U) 33 12/27/01, 10:32 PM TUNING 4 Automatic and manual tuning There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. PRESET/TUNING VCR ■ Automatic tuning V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED A AM 144O 1 When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER y STANDBY /ON BASS • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. TREBLE SILENT STEREO EFFECT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. 3 2 3 4 1 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” at left. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. SYSTEM INPUT or STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER POWER TV AV CD DVD TUNING MODE Front panel AUTO VCR A B AUTO/MAN'L MONO AMP Goes off If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Remote control 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING EDIT or 3 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED FM/AM Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. 3 A AM 144O Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. PRESET/TUNING TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. VCR PRESET/TUNING V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. TUNER TUNED EDIT A AM 144O 34 0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 34 12/27/01, 10:32 PM TUNING Notes Presetting stations VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Lights up ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number and the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again. ADVANCED OPERATION Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 32 1 Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. PREPARATION You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 37). INTRODUCTION ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • When a station data is stored under a preset number, the frequency and reception band are also stored. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO MEMORY A1:FM APPENDIX VCR CD VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. English 35 0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 35 12/27/01, 10:32 PM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET/TUNING STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED MEMORY 2,5 1 4 3 C3:AM 63O kHz 5 Tune in to a station. See page 34 for tuning instructions. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED A AM 63O kHz L R When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of received station. 2 L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. MEMORY The station band and frequency appear on the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED C3:AM 63O kHz L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Flashes Notes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED MEMORY C :AM 63O kHz L R 36 0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 36 12/27/01, 10:32 PM TUNING Tuning in to a preset station Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. INTRODUCTION You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E BASS EFFECT EDIT TREBLE SILENT – PHONES + – + STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES – + PREPARATION 2 1 + 2,4 1,3 1,3 EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU 1 2 MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST DISPLAY RETURN Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. AUDIO DISC SKIP 1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED MEMORY EDIT E1:FM 87.5 MHz SET MENU A/B/C/D/E or MENU Front panel Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. VCR SELECT MD/CD-R TUNER CD A5:FM 9O.6 MHz + Front panel DVD L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PRESET/TUNING MEMORY Remote control EDIT EDIT E1-A5 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER APPENDIX Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. VCR CD TUNED E1:FM 87.5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – D-TV/CBL VOLUME PRESET/TUNING or V-AUX TUNED MEMORY 4 PRESET/CH Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 A/B/C/D/E 2 VCR PRESET/TUNING BASIC OPERATION 1 REC MHz English 37 0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 37 12/27/01, 10:32 PM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external component(s) connected to AC OUTLET(S). Canceling the sleep timer 1 The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. y Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. SLEEP • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM 1 STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 2 – MUTE 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD SLEEP MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP DSP PCM 3 SLEEP 12Omin VOLUME L R The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display soon after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP DSP PCM CONCERT HALL VOLUME L R 38 0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 38 12/27/01, 10:32 PM RECORDING 1 2 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING TREBLE A/B/C/D/E EDIT – + – + TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM 2 STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software – MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT Turn on the power of this unit and all connected component. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP INPUT or Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ■ Timer playback/recording This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating instructions for the component and the timer to be used. Notes • Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output when recording with a timer, turn the volume down. APPENDIX Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is disconnected from the AC outlet. However, if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front panel For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. BASIC OPERATION + TV VOL If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. PREPARATION BASS SILENT PHONES Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between the components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, VOLUME, “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not effect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded. • A given input source is not output to the same OUT (REC) channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not output to VCR OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. English 39 0107V530_34-39_EN(U) 39 12/27/01, 10:33 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. Adjusting the items on the SET MENU y • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. Items 1 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Initial settings SPEAKER SET A CENTER B MAIN C REAR LR D BASS E MAIN Lv AMP VCR A + + + TV CH VOLUME TV VOL B – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 – MUTE LRG (large) LARGE LRG (large) BOTH Nrm (Normal) HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 6 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL 3,6 PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – 2 + SELECT TEST 2 LFE LEVEL SP/HP RETURN 0 dB 4,5 DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP 3 SP DLY TIME 0 ms 4 D. RANGE SP/HP MAX 5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R 6 HP TONE CTRL BASS/TRBL 0 dB 7 I/O ASSIGN Note • Some items require extra steps. 1 Press AMP. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. RX-V530 AMP SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E A (component video input) [A] DVD [B] D-TV/CBL B (optical output) (1) MD/CD-R C (optical input) (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL D (coaxial input) (5) CD RX-V430 3 (1) DVD (2) CD 8 INPUT MODE AUTO 9 DISPLAY SET DIMMER 0 10 MEM. GUARD OFF Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the front panel display. Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. 40 40 – SELECT + • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. • In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the default setting is indicated in bold. 0108V530_40-45_EN(U) PRESET/CH y 4 C (optical input) D (coaxial input) Press u/d repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust (1 to 10). 12/27/01, 10:33 PM PRESET/CH – SELECT + PRESET/CH – SELECT + SET MENU 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. PRESET/CH – + SELECT 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu disappears or simply press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit SET MENU. PRESET/CH – SELECT + or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 9 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide better dialog localization for several listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the main left and right speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. BASIC OPERATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. ■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode) PREPARATION /DTS SUR. ENTERTAINMENT Notes • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, some items are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1D are not affected. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 41 0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 41 12/27/01, 10:33 PM SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode) ■ 1D BASS (LFE/bass out mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both main left and right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the main left and right channel signal is directed to the main left and right speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. ■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the rear left and right speakers. SML Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. BOTH The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Lowfrequency signals designated to the main channels in accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed to both main speakers and a subwoofer. Note • When you select MAIN for “1D BASS”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. ■ 1E MAIN Lv (main level mode) y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you select NON for “1C REAR LR”. Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, and rear (L/R) speakers with the main speakers because of unusually high-efficiency performance from the main speakers. Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB Nrm Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 42 0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 42 12/27/01, 10:33 PM SET MENU 2 LFE LEVEL Control range: SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted. 2 Press j to adjust the LFE level. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 1 Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay of the center channel sounds. Center speaker image C R RR y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RL ADVANCED OPERATION C L BASIC OPERATION Control range: CENTER .......................... 0 to 5 ms Initial setting: CENTER .......................... 0 ms PREPARATION 1 Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speaker, with a source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the main left and right speaker to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) APPENDIX English 43 0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 43 12/27/01, 10:33 PM SET MENU 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital signals. Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum) MAX Select the “MAX” for feature films. STD Select the “STD” for general use. MIN Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. 7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more components. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks RX-V530 Choices: 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and right speakers) ■ [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL [B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL RX-V530 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jack Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the main left and right speakers. Choices: Control range: 20 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks 1 Press i to decrease the output level for the main left speaker. Press j for the main right speaker. RX-V530 Choices: 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): BASS ............... TRBL (treble) .. Initial setting: BASS ............... TRBL ............... –6 to +3 –6 to +3 0 dB 0 dB (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (2) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (3) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (4) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD RX-V430 Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jack RX-V530 Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD RX-V430 Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD Notes • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. 44 0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 44 12/27/01, 10:33 PM SET MENU 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) INTRODUCTION Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 25 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST PREPARATION AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the respective source. 9 DISPLAY SET BASIC OPERATION ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 10 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select ON to protect the following features: • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, and subwoofer levels • DSP program parameters Notes • When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. APPENDIX English 45 0108V530_40-45_EN(U) 45 12/27/01, 10:33 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other component The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component to be controlled by pressing an input selector button. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM Å/ı buttons and input selector buttons POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER TRANSMIT CODE SET VCR Press AMP to control this unit. STANDBY POWER A AMP B + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 MUTE /DTS SUR. 9 The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, 6CH INPUT, VOLUME +/– and MUTE) function in any mode. Å/ı buttons and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å/ı buttons are to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. Factory setting: Å...VCR ı...TV SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER POWER TV AV CD + VOLUME + TV VOL – +– TV CH MUTE – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU A/B/C/D/E – SELECT 3 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. DISPLAY RETURN ENTERTAINMENT 2 MONO MOVIE + TEST ROCK CONCERT 1 TV SPORTS MENU TITLE 9 ENTER EFFECT REC LEVEL AUDIO DISC SKIP PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Component control area You can control up to 9 different components. You can set up manufacturer code and program other remote control functions for each component (see page 48). 46 0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 46 12/27/01, 10:33 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the manufacturer code The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each component control. Component category (Library) Manufacturer CD CD YAMAHA 0005 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 0024 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 0003 1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to select the component control for which you want to clear the manufacturer code. Code DVD YAMAHA 0098 – – – V-AUX – – – VCR – – – A – – – B – – – 2 POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER TV AV CD Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Note 1 CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 1. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the selected component is cleared. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to select the component you want to set up. y • You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the code number “9990”. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TRANSMIT CODE SET 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES” at the end of this manual. HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 APPENDIX 5 /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION DVD D-TV/CBL SYSTEM STANDBY POWER PREPARATION Component control (buttons) ■ Clearing setup manufacturer code for the component control INTRODUCTION You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9 component controls. Clearing setup manufacturer codes ENTER EFFECT The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. English Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 47 0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 47 12/27/01, 10:33 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components You can operate other components when you have set the manufacturer code for your component. Note, however, that some buttons may not operate your component. Once you select an input source, the remote control switches to the mode for operating the component. TRANSMIT CODE SET 1 2 SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 MUTE 7 5 /DTS SUR. 9 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER w EFFECT + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 8 LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE e A/B/C/D/E – 9 – 0 RETURN + SELECT TEST 5 6 DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 CD player ENTERTAINMENT 4 DISPLAY AUDIO q DISC SKIP CD/MD recorder Tuner 1 AV POWER *1Power *1Power *3VCR power *1Power *1Power *1Power 2 TV POWER *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power 3 TV CH + *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV CH – *2TV channel down *2TV channel down TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down 4 TV VOL + *2TV volume up *2TV volume up TV volume up *2TV volume up *2TV volume up *2TV volume up TV VOL – *2TV volume down *2TV volume down TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV mute *2TV mute TV mute *2TV mute *2TV mute *2TV mute 5 TV MUTE 6 TV INPUT * TV input * TV input TV input * TV input * TV input *2TV input 7 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) 8 TITLE 9 PRESET/CH u PRESET/CH d 2 Up VCR channel up Preset up VCR channel down Preset down Left Right q REC/DISC SKIP 2 Down PRESET/CH i SELECT 2 Title PRESET/CH j 0 RETURN 2 Select Return Disc skip Rec *3VCR rec Disc skip Play Play *3VCR play Play Play e Search backward Search backward *3VCR search backward Search backward Search backward r Search forward Search forward *3VCR search forward Search forward Search forward Pause *3VCR pause w AUDIO d Pause Skip backward y Skip forward w ENTER e MENU r DISPLAY Rec (MD) Audio t a r REC Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Stop Stop *3VCR stop Stop Stop Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index Display Display Menu A/B/C/D/E Display *1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button. *2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or ı. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and ı areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR. 48 0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 48 12/27/01, 10:33 PM ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS 3 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or rear left and right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. PRESET/CH TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD D-TV/CBL VCR A + + STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. AMP B HALL 9 ENTER EFFECT + PRESET/CH LEVEL TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST DISPLAY RETURN MUTE ROCK CONCERT REC ENTERTAINMENT – ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO 2 2 3 DISC SKIP Press AMP. AMP Notes • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1D BASS” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps described in “Using the test tone” on pages 21 and 22. ■ For 5ch Stereo (While playing a source) 2 + You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 5channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% • CT level (Center level) • RL level (Rear left level) • RR level (Rear right level) ADVANCED OPERATION Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display as follows: center, rear right, rear left and subwoofer. LEVEL TITLE Rear right speaker output level Rear left speaker output level 1 2 Select 5ch Stereo. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Center speaker output level BASIC OPERATION 1 SELECT PREPARATION 1 POWER INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, rear left and right, and subwoofer) while listening to a source. APPENDIX Subwoofer output level y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d / u. PRESET/CH – TITLE SELECT English LEVEL + 49 0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 49 12/27/01, 10:33 PM ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 The following table shows factory-set delay time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Program CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT DISCO GAME CONCERT VIDEO TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE Spectacle 6.1 70 mm SCI-FI Sci-Fi 6.1 DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE Adventure 6.1 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL General 6.1 PRO LOGIC/NORMAL DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL Matrix 6.1 PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED Enhanced 6.1 PRO LOGIC Movie PRO LOGIC Music Preset value (ms) 45 30 15 26 36 21 10 69 23 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 15 5 5 5 20 5 5 5 15 5 A STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT AMP B 50 JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 ENTERTAINMENT 2 EFFECT + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT LEVEL PRESET/CH JAZZ CLUB A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST MUTE HALL SET MENU MENU TITLE ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO 3 4 DISC SKIP 1 Press AMP. AMP (While playing a source) 2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the delay time. 3 Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the front panel display. PRESET/CH – 4 SELECT + DELAY Press j / i to adjust the delay time. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the delay time again. 50 0109V530_46-51_EN(U) HALL 12/27/01, 10:33 PM ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC Music parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Adjustments should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM AV CD MD/CD-R DVD VCR 1 D-TV/CBL A STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. AMP B HALL 9 ENTERTAINMENT 2 ENTER EFFECT + + + LEVEL PRESET/CH TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV VOL TV INPUT JAZZ CLUB 3 4 A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST ROCK CONCERT DISPLAY RETURN MUTE HALL SET MENU MENU TITLE REC ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO • You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEM. GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. ■ PANORAMA 1 Press AMP. 2 Select PRO LOGIC AMP Function: Choices: 9 ■ DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). SELECT 0 Press u / d to select the parameter. – Press j / i to change the parameter value. + PRESET/CH – SELECT + Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. The larger the value, adjusts the center image towards the main left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from main left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. APPENDIX 5 SELECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) PRESET/CH ADVANCED OPERATION /DTS SUR. Music. Turning the function on extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. BASIC OPERATION PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions DISC SKIP 3 PREPARATION POWER TV INTRODUCTION Note Changing parameter settings POWER MUSIC Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to change other parameters. English 51 0109V530_46-51_EN(U) 51 12/27/01, 10:33 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound. RX-V530 The picture does not appear. Cause Remedy The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. — The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to either the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in the standby mode. 12 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 10, 11 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then start operating. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10 – 16 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 23 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 24 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. — Digital signals which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of video jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and output. 52 0110V530_52-59_EN(U) Refer to page 52 12/27/01, 10:33 PM — 10, 11 14, 15 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. 12 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. — Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10, 11 Incorrect setting of “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 44 The sound effect is off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on. 28 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. No sound from the center speaker. — Raise the level of the center speaker. 49 “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 41 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected (except for 5ch Stereo). Select another DSP program. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with program 9. Select another DSP program. “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 42 “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 42 Poor bass reproduction. 26 – 33 APPENDIX The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). 49 — Select MAIN. 42 The speaker mode settings (main, center, or rear) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate position for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 41, 42 53 0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 53 12/27/01, 10:33 PM English “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No sound from the subwoofer. 26 – 33 ADVANCED OPERATION The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. 26 – 33 BASIC OPERAIONT A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. PREPARATION No sound from the effect speakers. Refer to page INTRODUCTION Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Remedy TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. RX-V530 Refer to page 10 – 16 — — A source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. — The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Set “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU to OFF. — This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. 54 0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 54 12/27/01, 10:33 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 17 There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 35, 36 BASIC OPERAIONT AM Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. PREPARATION FM The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Refer to page INTRODUCTION FM stereo reception is noisy. Remedy ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Remote control The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Refer to page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The manufacture code has not correctly set. Set the code correctly. 47 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. — — English Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. APPENDIX Wrong distance or angle. 55 0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 55 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Problem 12/27/01, 10:33 PM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ■ Dolby Digital ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Matrix 6.1 The unit incorporates Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is created from rear left and right channels, and outputted from virtual rear center speaker.) With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over ” and “fly-around ” effects. ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed using headphones. ■ Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround softwares. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. 56 0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 56 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 12/27/01, 10:33 PM GLOSSARY YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) ■ Component video signal Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits PREPARATION ■ S-video signal INTRODUCTION ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP BASIC OPERAIONT ADVANCED OPERATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 57 0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 57 12/27/01, 10:33 PM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 75 W [Other models] .................................................................... 65 W 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 80 W [Other models] .................................................................... 70 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • DIN Standard Output Power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 110 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................... 95 W • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 95/115/140/160 W [Other models] ............................................... 90/110/130/150 W • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB GENERAL • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06% • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output ............................................................. 0.34 V/560 Ω • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ OUTPUT SUBWOOFER .......................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL • Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω • S-Video Signal Level RX-V530 Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz [Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] .................................................................... 210 W [Canada model] ...................................................... 210 W/260 VA [Other models] ..................................................................... 230 W Standby Mode ............................................................. max. 0.9 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models] .......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) RX-V530 ............ 435 x 151 x 387 mm (17” x 5-15/16” x 15-1/8”) RX-V430 ........... 435 x 151 x 380 mm (17” x 5-15/16” x 15-1/16”) • Weight ................................................................... 10.0 kg (21.3 lbs) • Accessories ............................................................... Remote control Batteries 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter [U.K. model] A/V cable [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models] AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna *Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Component Video Signal Level RX-V530 Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω PB/CB, PR/CR ............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ( RX-V530 ) ............... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ( RX-V530 ) ............................... DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB 58 0110V530_52-59_EN(U) 58 12/27/01, 10:33 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES LISTE DES CODES DES FABRICANTS ELECTRON ELIN ELTA EMERSON 0941 1001 0331 0001, 0021, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0091, 0111, 0811, 0821, 0831, 0841, 0851, 0861, 0871, 0901, 0921, 0941, 0981, 1011, 1031, 1051, 1081, 1091 ENVISION 0361, 1111 ERRES 1001 ETRON 0331 FERGUSON 1001 FINLUX 1001 FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981 FORMENTI 0441 FORMONTI 1001 FORTRESS 1141 FUJITSU 1091 FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501, 1521 FUTURETECH 1051 GE 0131, 0161, 0201, 0751, 0761, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0811, 0861, 1041 GEC 0271, 1001 GEMINI 0391 GENEXXA 0431 GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111 GOLDSTAR 0031, 0121, 0351, 0411, 0731, 0741, 0861, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 GOODMANS/TASHIKO 0271, 0661, 1001 GRANADA 1001 GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1851, 1861, 1871, 1881 GUNPY 1051, 1091 HARMAN/KARDON 0721 HALLMARK 0861 HANSEATIC 1001 HARVARD 1051, 1061 HINARI 1001, 1091 HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671, 0681, 0691, 0701, 0711, 0871, 0941, 0971, 1351 HYPSON 1001 IMA 1051 INDIANA 1001 INFINITY REFERENCE 0101 INTERFUNK 1001 ITT 0611 JANEIL 1131 JBL 0101 JCB 0951 JENSEN 0311 JINXING 1531, 1541, 1551, 1561, 1571, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1651, 1691, 1731 TV A TANDY 0941 ABEX 1151 ADMIRA 1141 ADVENTURA 1131 AIKO 1121 AIWA 1481 AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111 ALBA 0431 ALLERON 1091 AMBASSADOR 1081 AMSTRAD 0481, 1081 ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051, 1061, 1071 ANAM NATIONAL 1041 AOC 0361, 1021, 1031, 1111, 1161 ARCHER 1161 AUDIOSONIC 1001 AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161 BAUER 0441 BAUR 1001 BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561 BELCOR 1031 BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991 BEON 1001 BRADFORD 1051 BROCKWOOD 1031 BROKSONIC 1161 BUSH 1001 CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1131 CAPEHART 1021 CARVER 0101 CATHAY 1001 CELEBRITY 0951 CENTURION 0411 CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561, 1621 CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1121, 1131 CLAIRTONE 1011 CLARIVOX 1001 CONCERTO 0351, 0971 CONROWA 1751 CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011, 1051 CORANDO 0941 CRAIG 0251, 1051 CROWN 0941, 1051 CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361, 0931, 0941, 0981, 1111 CXC 1051 DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331, 0721, 0941, 1001, 1031, 1121, 1191, 1531, 1581, 1591, 1601 DANSAI 1001 DAYTRON 0941, 1031 DECCA 0271, 1001 DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071 DUMONT 0891, 1031 DYNATECH 0881 ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011 ELECTROHOME 0941 JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641, 0651, 0661, 0841 KAWASHO 0901 KAYPANI 1021 KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111 KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131 KTV 0921, 0941, 1011, 1051, 1111 LEYCO 1001 LIESENK & TTER 1001 LLOYTRON 0941 LOEWE 1001 LOGIK 0991, 1771 LUXMAN 0351, 0971 LXI 0101, 0621, 0761, 0861, 0981 MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391, 0401, 0411, 0421, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0661, 0961, 1111 MAJESTIC 0991 MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361, 1001, 1111 MARK 1001 MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001 MEDIATOR 1001 MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161 MEI 1011 M-ELECTRONIC 1001 MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861, 0971, 0981, 0991, 1771 METZ 1791, 1831, 1891, 1901, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1941 MGA 0361, 0561, 0571, 0861, 1031, 1111 MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891, 0941, 1151 MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561, 0571, 0661, 0861, 1031, 1101, 1381 MONTGOMERY 1091 MOTOROLA 1041, 1141 MTC 0351, 0361, 0881, 0931, 0971, 1011, 1031, 1111 MULTITECH 0881, 1051 NAD 0551, 0621, 0861 NEC 0241, 0351, 0361, 0661, 0971, 1031, 1111, 1321, 1711 NECKERMANN 1001 NEI 1001 NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001, 1151 NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121 NOVABEAM 0721 NTC 1121 ONWA 1051 OPTIMUS 0551 OPTONICA 0541, 1141 ORION 0831, 1001 OSAKI 0271, 1151 OTTO VERSAND 1001 PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251, 0751, 1041, 1311, 1371, 1431 PANDA 1541, 1721 PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521, 0531, 0621, 0731, 0751, 0761, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0931, 0941, 1031, 1041, 1111, 1151, 1161 PEONY 1561, 1621 PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1031, 1111 PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001 PHONOLA 1001 PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111 PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871 PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121 PRICECLUB 0931 PRISM 0751 PROSCAN 0761 PROTECH 1001 PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941, 1021, 1161 PULSAR 0891 PULSER 1031 QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041 QUELLE 1001 RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1151 RADIOLA 1001 RCA 0051, 0141, 0151, 0181, 0411, 0491, 0531, 0761, 0771, 0871, 1031 REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941, 0971, 0981, 1031, 1051, 1111, 1151 RHAPSODY 1011 R-LINE 1001 RUNCO 0891, 1111 SAISHO 0331, 1081 SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021, 1111, 1151 SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351, 0361, 0861, 0931, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 SAMSUX 0941 SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271, 0661, 0801, 0911, 0981, 1231, 1251, 1261 SBR 1001 SCHEIDER 1001 SCIMITSU 1031 SCOTCH 0861 SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1091 SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171, 0351, 0481, 0521, 0621, 0761, 0801, 0861, 0971, 0981, 1091 SHANGHAI 1561, 1681 SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541, 0661, 0911, 0941, 1141 SHOGUN 1031 SIGNATURE 0991, 1771 SIMPSON 0581, 0961 SOLAVOX 1151 SONOKO 1001 I 02V530_code(U) 1 12/27/01, 10:33 PM SONTEC SONY 1001 0371, 0451, 0661, 0841, 0951, 1281, 1441 SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051, 1091 SOUNDWAVE 1001 SPECTRICON 1161 SQUAREVIEW 0481 SSS 1031, 1051 STAR-LITE 1051 SUPREM 0951 SUPRE-MACY 1131 SURPA 0351, 0971 SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1111 SYMPHONIC 0481 SYSLINE 1001 TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141 TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001, 1041, 1161 TCL 1561, 1631, 1701 TECHNICS 0751 TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971 TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1051, 1091, 1121, 1131, 1771 TELETECH 0331 TERA 0501 THAKRAL 1671 THORM 1001 TMK 0351, 0861, 0971, 1081 TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621, 0661, 0931, 0981, 1301 TOSONIC 1011 TOTEVISION 0941 TRICAL 0911 UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791 UNIVERSUM 1001 VECTOR RESEARCH 0361, 1111 VESTEL 1001 VIDEO CONCEPT 1101 VIDIKRON 0101, 0211 VIDTECH 0861, 1031 VIKING 1131 WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451, 0541, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1091, 1111, 1771 WATSON 1001 XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661, 1741, 1761 YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111 YOKO 1001 ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891, 0991, 1771 ZONDA 1161 CABLE TV ABC 0256, 0376 ANTRONIX 0136 ARCHER 0136, 0286 BBT 0076 CABLETIME 0166 CABLEVISION 0196 COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346 COMTRONICS 0216, 0276 EAGLE COMTRONICS 0276 EASTERN 0066 ELECTRICORD 0206 ELECTUS 0266 GE 0116, 0126 GEC CABLE SYSTEM 0196 HAMLIN H5 0676 HAMLIN H6 0666 HAMLIN H6S 0656 HAMLIN H8 0646 HAMLIN H9 0636 JERROLD 0256 JERROLD 400L 0626 JERROLD 450L 0616 JERROLD 550 0606 JERROLD OSD CATV 0596 JERROLD SPRUCER 0436 MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS 0416, 0426 MAMM 0296 MEMOREX 0386 MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206 NORTHCOAST 0016 NSC 0146 OAK 0106 OAK SIGMA 450 0546 OAK SIGMA 550 0536 PANASONIC TZ 120/130 0476 PANASONIC TZ 170/180 0446 PANASONIC TZ140 0466 PANASONIC TZ150/160 0456 PARAGON 0386 PHILIPS 0036, 0216, 0306, 0316, 0326, 0336, 0346 PIONEER 0006, 0086 PIONEER BR50 0846 PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82 0696 PIONEER BR90 0556 PULSAR 0386 RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE SYSTEM 0396, 0406 REALISTIC 0136 REGENCY/EASTERN 0686 RUNCO 0386 SAMSUNG 0276 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475 0576 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75 0366, 0586 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650 0566 SIGNAL 0276 SL MARX 0276 SPECTAVISION 0236 STANDARD COMPONENTS 0186 STARCOM V 0256 STARGATE 0276 SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN 0376, 0496 TEKNIKA 0176 TELESERVICE 0056 TELEVIEW 0276 TEXSCAN 0186, 0376 TFC 0026 TOCOM 0226, 0356 TOCOM 5503A 0526 TOCOM 5503VIP/5507 0516 TOCOM TC56 0506 TOSHIBA 0386 TUDI 0046 UNIKA 0136 UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206, 0286 VIDEOWAY 0096 VIEWSTAR 0216 ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486 SATELLITE TUNER ALPHA STAR 0826 CHAPARRAL 0756 ECHOSTAR 0836 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0776, 0876 HTS 0836 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0816 JERROLD 0776, 0786 PANASONIC 0806 PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786 RCA 0766 SONY 0796 (DBS) HITACHI MAGNAVOX MEMOREX PANASONIC PHILIPS SONY STAR CHOICE TOSHIBA UNIDEN 0856 0886 0886 0896 0886 0906 0876 0866, 0916 0886 VCR A TANDY ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA AKAI 0902 0992 0982 0992 0262, 0942, 0952, 0962, 0972 AMERICAN HIGH 0932 AMSTRAD 0992 ASA 0002, 0912 ASHA 0922 AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202 AUDIOVOX 0912 BEAUMARK 0922 BELL & HOWELL 0902 BLAUPUNKT 0412 BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892 BUSH 0852 CALIX 0912 CANON 0862, 0932 CCE 0852, 0982 CITIZEN 0912, 0982 COLT 0852 CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852, 0912, 0922 II 02V530_code(U) 2 12/27/01, 10:33 PM CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822, 0932 CYBERNEX 0922 DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982 DBX 0202 DYNATECH 0472, 0992 ELECTROHOME 0912 ELECTROPHONIC 0912 EMEREX 0792 EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142, 0152, 0162, 0172, 0182, 0192, 0212, 0702, 0712, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0752, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0872, 0882, 0892, 0912, 0952, 0992, 1072 FINLUX 0002, 0992 FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902 FUJI 0672, 0932 FUNAI 0992 GARRARD 0992 GE 0662, 0822, 0932 GO VIDEO 0642, 0652 GOLDSTAR 0082, 0632, 0912 GOODMANS 0402 GRADIENTE 0992 GRANDA 0612, 0902 GRUNDIG 0002 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0992 HARMAN/KARDON 0632, 1082 HARWOOD 0752, 0852 HEADQUARTER 0612 HI-Q 0842 HINARI 0852 HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572, 0582, 0592, 0602, 0992 ITT 0942 JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532, 0542, 0552 KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612, 0632, 0902 KLH 0852 KODAK 0912, 0932 LLOYD 0992 LOGIK 0852 LUXOR 0942 LXI 0022, 0912 MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492, 0502, 0512, 0932 MAGNIN 0922 MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402, 0632, 0932 MARTA 0912 MATSUSHITA 0932 MATSUI 0722 MEI 0222, 0932 MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472, 0512, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 MGA 0762, 0952 MGA TECHNOLOGY 0922 MINOLTA 0592, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542, 0762, 0952, 1082 MOTOROLA 0472, 0932 MTC 0922, 0992 TEAC TECHNICS TEKNIKA 0992 0932 0322, 0912, 0932, 0992 TELEFUNKEN 0252 TMK 0212, 0732, 0772, 0922 TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342, 0622, 0682, 0712, 0762 TOTEVISION 0912, 0922 UNITECH 0922 VECTOR RESEARCH 0202, 0432, 0632 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0202, 0432, 0632, 0952 WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472, 0482, 0602, 0712, 0842, 0852, 0922, 0932, 0992 YAMAHA 0202, 0632 ZENITH 0042, 0362, 0512, 0672 MULTITECH NAD NEC 0852, 0992 0442 0122, 0202, 0292, 0422, 0432, 0542, 0632 NIKKO 0912 NOBLEX 0922 OLYMPUS 0412, 0932 OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912 OPTONICA 0402 ORION 0212, 0722, 0742, 0772 OSAKI 0912 PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092, 0222, 0372, 0382, 0392, 0412, 0932 PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602, 0632, 0692, 0912, 0922, 0932 PENTAX 0592, 0602 PERDIO 0992 PHILCO 0002, 0932 PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402, 0492, 0932 PILOT 0912 PIONEER 0442, 0542 PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022, 1032, 1042, 1052, 1062 PULSAR 0512 QUARTER 0612 QUARTZ 0272, 0612 QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932 RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992 RADIX 0912 RANDEX 0912 RCA 0112, 0382, 0392, 0482, 0592, 0602, 0662, 0822, 0942 REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612, 0682, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 RICOH 0352, 0362 SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0772 SALORA 0612, 0762 SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922, 0962 SANKY 0472, 0512 SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832 SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0922 SBR 0002, 0282 SCHEIDER 0852 SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762, 0872, 0882, 0892 SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602, 0612, 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0932 SHARP 0402, 0472 SHINTOM 0852 SHOGUN 0922 SINGER 0852 SONY 0032, 0332, 0352, 0362, 0672, 0792, 0932 STS 0602 SUNPAK 0352 SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502, 0762, 0932, 0992 SYMPHONIC 0992 TANDY 0992 TASHIKO 0712, 0992 DVD PLAYER AKAI DENON HITACHI JVC (VICTOR) KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TECHNICS THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZENITH 0058 0188 0198 0088, 0178 0148 0128 0138 0068, 0128 0028 0098, 0128 0108, 0118 0158 0158 0078 0038 0018 0028 0168 0048, 0128 0008, 0028, 0098 0128 LD PLAYER AIWA 0157 DENON 0147 DISCO VISION 0017 FUNAI 0157 HITACHI (E) 0017 KENWOOD 0087, 0107 MAGNAVOX 0027 MARANTZ 0027 MITSUBISHI 0137 NAD 0137 PANASONIC 0077, 0177 PHILIPS 0027 PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137 RCA 0167 REALISTIC 0157 SHARP 0127 SONY 0047, 0057, 0117 VICTOR 0097 YAMAHA 0007, 0067 REALISTIC CD PLAYER ACOUSTIC RESEARCH 1295 ADC 0025, 0065 ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015 ADS 0265 AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035, 1055 AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535 ALPINE 1215, 1305 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545 BSR 0245, 0655, 0775 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 0055 CAPETRONIC 1205 CARRERA 0245 CARVER 0285, 1135 CASIO 0345 CROWN 0185 CURTIS MATHES 0345 DENON 0275, 0875, 0885 DEUAL (E) 0505 DYNAMIC BASS (H) 0555 EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105 EROICA 1275 FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925, 1005 GARRARD 0365 GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105 GOLDSTAR 1135, 1225, 1265, 1335 HARMAN/KARDON 0105, 0175, 0465, 0995 HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505, 0815 INKEL 0115, 0395 JVC (VICTOR) 0315 KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405, 0585, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0755, 0895 KYOCERA 0025 LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675, 0705, 0715, 0985 MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645, 0955 MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375, 0785, 1345 MCINTOSH 0355, 1085 MCS 0905, 1315 MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235, 0305, 0325, 1105 MGA 0135 MISSION 0215 MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445 MTC 1255 NAD 0035, 0615, 0685, 0695 NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515 NEC 0255, 0905, 0965 NIKKO 0545, 1005 ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495, 0805, 1155 OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555, 0595, 0845, 0855, 0865, 0895, 0935 PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095, 1125 PENNY 0905 PHILIPS 0165, 0215 PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045 PROTON 0215, 1185 QUASAR 0055 RCA 0205, 0915, 1115 0205, 0225, 0235, 0325, 0555, 0845 REVOX 1175 ROTEL 0215 SABA TELECOMMANDER (E) 0505 SAE 0215 SAMSUNG 1285 SANSUI 0215, 0625, 0975, 1025, 1105 SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635, 0765 SCOTT 0325, 1105 SEARS 0345 SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895, 1065, 1075 SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395, 0475 SIEMENTS GARRARD 1245 SIGNATURE 0175 SONTEC 1165 SONY 0065, 0565, 0865, 1145 STARON 1235 STS 0025 SYLVANIA 0215 SYMPHONIC 0335 TANDY 0305 TANGBERG 1195 TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385, 0525, 0795, 0835, 1355 TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095 TECHWOOD 1325 TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505 THOMSON (E) 0505 TOSHIBA 0035, 0685 VECTOR RESEARCH 0065, 1135 WARDS 0175 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085, 0415, 0545, 0575, 1065 CD RECORDER/CDRW HITACHI JVC (VICTOR) MARANTZ PHILIPS PIONEER YAMAHA 0474 0504 0484, 0494 0444 0454, 0464 0414 MD RECORDER KENWOOD PIONEER SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0384 0424 0434 0394 0024, 0394, 0404 III 02V530_code(U) 3 12/27/01, 10:33 PM TAPE DECK AIWA AKAI CARVER DENON FISHER GARRARD JVC (VICTOR) KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MITSUBISHI OPTIMUS ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER REVOX SANSUI SHARP SHERWOOD SONY TEAC TECHNICS WARDS YAMAHA 0094, 0214, 0224 0184 0094 0304 0144 0194, 0204 0274, 0284, 0294 0124, 0134, 0154, 0234, 0244, 0264 0094 0094, 0344 0184 0034, 0064, 0204, 0334 0364, 0374 0094 0034, 0044, 0064 0354 0094, 0344 0264 0334 0054, 0084, 0324 0194, 0254 0074, 0314 0034 0004, 0014, 0104, 0114, 0164, 0174, 0264 IV 02V530_code(U) 4 12/27/01, 10:33 PM YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 03V530(U)-cv4 1 Printed in Malaysia 12/27/01, 10:33 PM V874570-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
Yamaha RX-V430 Handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- Handleiding
- Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V430 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V430 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha RX-V430 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha RX-V430 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha RX-V430 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V430 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha RX-V430 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V430 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V430 Ohjekirja
- čeština: Yamaha RX-V430 Uživatelský manuál
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V430 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha RX-V430 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha RX-V430 Manual de utilizare
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Yamaha RX-V800 Handleiding
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-